Operating Instructions

Blu-ray Disc PLAYER
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 1 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: inside of the unit
D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En
CAUTION
ATTENTION
ADVARSEL
VARNING
VORSICHT
PRECAUCIÓN
VARO!
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B
QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING.
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA
DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN
VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE
E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
注意 ここを開くと CLASS 3B の可視レーザ光及び不可視レーザ
光が出ます。ビームを直接見たり、触れたりしないこと。
WAßNING
To prevenI a fire hazard, do noI pIace any naked
fIame sources (such as a IighIed candIe) on Ihe
equipmenI. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
WAßNING
This equipmenI is noI vaIerproof. To prevenI a fire
or shock hazard, do noI pIace any conIainer fiIIed
viIh Iiquid near Ihis equipmenI (such as a vase or
fIover poI) or expose iI Io dripping, spIashing, rain
or moisIure. D3-4-2-1-3_ß_En
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
2
En
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 2 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
¦¦ ¦ne /C U¦uç o¦ ¦nis uni¦ Joes no¦ ·a¦cn ¦ne /C
ou¦¦e¦ ,ou wan¦ ¦o use. ¦ne U¦uç ·us¦ Ue re·oveJ
anJ aUUroUria¦e one ¦i¦¦eJ. FeU¦ace·en¦ anJ
·oun¦inç o¦ an /C U¦uç on ¦ne Uower suUU¦, corJ o¦
¦nis uni¦ snou¦J Ue Uer¦or·eJ on¦, U, Jua¦i¦ieJ
service Uersonne¦. ¦¦ connec¦eJ ¦o an /C ou¦¦e¦. ¦ne
cu¦o¦¦ U¦uç can cause severe e¦ec¦rica¦ snoc¦. Ma¦e
sure i¦ is UroUer¦, JisUoseJ o¦ a¦¦er re·ova¦.
Tne eJuiU·en¦ snou¦J Ue Jisconnec¦eJ U, re·ovinç
¦ne ·ains U¦uç ¦ro· ¦ne wa¦¦ soc¦e¦ wnen ¦e¦¦
unuseJ ¦or a ¦onç UerioJ o¦ ¦i·e (¦or ea·U¦e. wnen
on vaca¦ion). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002*_En
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
For U.K. model:
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
For Australia Model
C67-7-3_En
3
En
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 3 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale
where you purchased the items.
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
For countries outside the European Union:
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
ask for the correct method of disposal.
K058a_A1_En
Symbol examples
for batteries
Symbol for
equipment
Pb
4
En
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 4 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
5
En
Contents
01 Before you start
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Putting the batteries in the remote control. . . . . . . . . . 6
Types of discs/files that can be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
02 Connecting up
Connecting using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
About KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting video and audio cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using an optical
digital audio cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting components to the USB port . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About USB (external storage) devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting the USB (external storage) device. . . . . . 17
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting via an Ethernet hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting the power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
03 Getting Started
Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu. . . . 18
Operating the TV with the player’s remote control . . . . 19
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Using the TOOLS menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switching the video output terminal to be viewed . . . . 21
Switching the output video resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
04 Playback
Playing discs or files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Forward and reverse scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks . . . . . . . . . . 25
Skipping content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Step forward and step reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Switching the camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Switching the audio and secondary audio . . . . . . . . . 26
Switching the secondary video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Displaying the disc information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing from a specific time (Time Search) . . . . . . . . 28
Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) . . . 28
Playing a specific section within a title or track
repeatedly (A-B Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Playing in random order (Random Play). . . . . . . . . . . 29
About Play Mode types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Playing from the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Playing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . 32
05 Adjusting audio and video
Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Adjusting the audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
06 Advanced settings
Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operating the Initial Setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Software updating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Restoring all the settings to the factory default
settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
About the audio output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Language Code Table and Country/Area Code
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
07 Additional information
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Moving the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Place of installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Turn the power off when not using the player . . . . . . 54
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Cleaning the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a
glass door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
KURO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 5 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
01
6
En
Chapter 1
Before you start
What’s in the box
• Remote control x 1
• Video/audio cable (yellow/white/red plugs) x 1
• AA/R6 dry cell batteries x 2
• Warranty card
• Operating instructions (this document)
• U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: Power cord x 1
Others: Power cord x 2
Putting the batteries in the
remote control
1 Open the rear cover.
2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2).
Insert as indicated by the ±/¸ marks into the battery
compartment.
3 Close the rear cover.
Close securely (a click should be heard).
Caution
• Do not use any batteries other than the ones
specified. Also, do not use a new battery together with
an old one.
• When loading the batteries into the remote control,
set them in the proper direction, as indicated by the
polarity marks (± and ¸).
• Do not heat batteries, disassemble them, or throw
them into flames or water.
• Batteries may have different voltages, even if they look
similar. Do not use different kinds of batteries
together.
• To prevent leakage of battery fluid, remove the
batteries if you do not plan to use the remote control
for a long period of time (1 month or more). If the fluid
should leak, wipe it carefully off the inside of the case,
then insert new batteries. If a battery should leak and
the fluid should get on your skin, flush it off with large
quantities of water.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or environmental public
institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
• WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
D3-4-2-3-3_En
Press lightly on this
part and slide into
the direction of the
arrow.
Insert the negative
(¸) side first.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 6 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
7
En
01 Types of discs/files that can be played
Playable discs
Discs with the logo marks below indicated on the disc label, package or jacket can be played.
“Blu-ray Disc” and are trademarks.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
Disc type Logo
Application format
BDMV
1
1. Including the AVCHD format.
BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR
CD-DA
DTS-CD
DATA-DISC
2
2. Discs on which video, image or audio files are recorded.
BD
3
3. Including dual-layered discs.
BD-ROM v v X X X X
BD-R
4
4. Finalize (close) them before playing them on this player.
v v X X X X
BD-RE v v X X X X
DVD
DVD-ROM v X v X X v
DVD-R
3,4,5
5. DVD-R for Authoring discs (3.95 and 4.7 GB) cannot be played.
v X v v X v
DVD-RW
4,6
6. Version 1.0 DVD-RW discs cannot be played.
v X v v X v
DVD+R
3,4
v X v X X v
DVD+RW
4
v X v X X v
CD
CD-DA
(Audio CD)
X X X X v X
CD-R
4
X X X X v v
CD-RW
4
X X X X v v
CD-ROM X X X X v v
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 7 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
01
8
En
+ Discs that cannot be played
• HD DVDs
• DVD Audio discs
• DVD-RAM discs
• SACDs
• Video CDs
• SVCDs
It is possible that some discs other than the ones listed
above may not be playable either.
Note
• Some discs cannot be played, even if one of the logo
marks on the previous page is indicated.
• To play 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc
depression in the center of the disc tray. No adapter
is necessary. 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be played.
+ About audio formats
The following audio formats are supported on this player:
• Dolby TrueHD
• Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS-HD Master Audio
• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
• DTS Digital Surround
• MPEG
• MPEG-2 AAC
• Linear PCM
To enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby
Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, it is recommended to connect the
player to an AV receiver or amplifier compatible with
these audio formats using an HDMI cable. After loading
a BD containing sound in one of these audio formats,
select the audio format on the menu screen.
See About the audio output settings on page 45 for the
output conditions of the different formats.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;
6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is
a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD
and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of
DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
+ Playing BDs
• BDs (BDMV) compatible with the formats below can
be played.
– Blu-ray Disc Read-Only (ROM) Format Version 2
– Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 2
– Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 3
This player supports BD-ROM Profile 2.
BONUSVIEW functions such as playback of
secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) and secondary
audio can be used. The data used with the
BONUSVIEW functions (the secondary video
(Picture-in-Picture) and secondary audio data) may
be stored in the storage. For details on secondary
video and secondary audio playback, refer to the
disc’s instructions.
“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc
Association.
BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie
trailers or additional audio and subtitle languages
and playing on-line games can be enjoyed over the
Internet. The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE
function (trailers, etc.) is stored in the storage. Refer
to the disc’s instructions for details about BD-LIVE
functions.
“BD-LIVE” logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc
Association.
With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use BD-J (Java)
applications to create highly interactive titles, for
example including games.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
The player’s internal storage has a maximum capacity
of roughly 1 GB. Use an external storage connected to
the USB port if you want to store large quantities of
data (page 16). If a message saying there is not
enough storage space appears, erase any
unnecessary data (page 42).
• BDs (BDAV) compatible with the formats below can
be played.
– Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 1
– Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 2
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 8 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
9
En
01
+ Playing DVDs
This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW
discs recorded in VR format (Video Recording format).
However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once
encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a
CPRM compatible device.
The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video camera
recorder format recording high-definition onto certain
media by using highly efficient codec technologies.
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of
Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
+ About region numbers
Blu-ray Disc Player and BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs are
assigned region numbers according to the region in
which they are sold.
This player’s region numbers are:
• BD-ROM:
– U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B
– Others: A
• DVD-Video:
– U.K. models: 2
– Australia and New Zealand models: 4
– Others: 3
Discs not including these numbers cannot be played.
Discs playable on this player are as shown below.
• BDs:
– U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B
(including B) and ALL
– Others: A (including A) and ALL
• DVDs:
– U.K. models: 2 (including 2) and ALL
– Australia and New Zealand models: 4 (including 4)
and ALL
– Others: 3 (including 3) and ALL
+ Playing CDs
Regarding copy protected CDs: This player is designed to
conform to the specifications of the Audio CD format.
This player does not support the playback or function of
discs that do not conform to these specifications.
+ DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content — video, audio, etc. — while the
other side contains non-DVD content such as digital
audio material.
The DVD side of a DualDisc can be played on this player
(excluding any DVD-Audio content).
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compatible
with this player.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.
Scratched discs may not be playable.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or
disc retailer.
+ Playing discs created on computers
or BD/DVD recorders
• It may not be possible to play discs recorded using a
computer due to the application settings or
computer’s environment settings. Record discs in a
format playable on this player. For details, contact the
dealer.
• It may not be possible to play discs recorded using a
computer or a BD/DVD recorder, if burn quality is not
good due to characteristics of the disc, scratches, dirt
on the disc, dirt on the recorder’s lens, etc.
Playable files
Video, image and audio files recorded on DVDs and CDs
can be played.
Caution
• In DVD, only the one recorded by the ISO 9660 file
system can be played.
• Some files may not be playable.
• For some files, it may not be possible to use certain
functions during playback.
• It may not be possible to play some files, even if they
have the extension of a file playable on this player.
• Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management)
cannot be played (not including DivX VOD files).
+ Supported video file formats
• DivX
DivX
®
is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc.
This is an official DivX Certified or DivX Ultra Certified
device that plays DivX video.
Conform to the size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480
pixels.
DivX files encoded with GMC/Qpel option cannot be
played.
Only audio signals with MP3 or Dolby Digital (AC3)
format are output.
Note that files other than the ones containing DivX
video cannot be played, even if they have the
extension “.avi”.
DivX
®
is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is
used under license.
– Plays DivX
®
video
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 9 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
01
10
En
Note
• This DivX
®
Certified device must be registered in
order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your
device and submit it during the registration process.
[Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX
DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that
restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices.
If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for
your device, the message Authorization Error will be
displayed and your content will not play.] Learn more
at www.divx.com/vod.
– This player’s DivX VOD registration code can be
checked at Initial Setup ¬ Playback ¬ DivX
VOD ¬ Registration Code (page 39).
– The number of views is restricted for some DivX
VOD files. When such files are played on this
player, the remaining number of views is displayed.
Files for which the remaining number of views has
reached 0 cannot be played (Rental Expired is
displayed). Files for which the number of views is
not restricted can be played as many times as you
like (the remaining number of views is not
displayed).
+ Supported image file formats
• JPEG
File format: JFIF Ver. 1.02/Exif Ver. 2.2
Resolution: Up to 4096 x 4096 pixels
Only baseline JPEG files are supported.
+ Supported audio file formats
• Windows Media™ Audio 9 (WMA9)
Bit rate: Up to 192 kbps
Sampling frequencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz
and 48 kHz
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft
Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without
a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps
Sampling frequencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz
+ Playable file extensions
• Video files
.divx and .avi
• Image files
.jpg and .jpeg
• Audio files
.wma and .mp3
Part Names and
Functions
Remote Control
1 C STANDBY/ON – Press to turn the power on and
off.
2 TV CONTROL – (page 19)
3 AUDIO – (page 26)
4 SUBTITLE – (page 25)
5 Number buttons – Use these to select and play the
title/chapter/track you want to view or listen to and to
select items from menus.
CLEAR – Press to clear the numeric number, etc.
ENTER – Press to execute the selected item or enter a
setting that has been changed, etc.
6 SECONDARY AUDIO – (page 26)
SECONDARY VIDEO – (page 26)
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER
CLEAR ENTER
VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
BD PLAYER
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW
VIDEO ADJUST
INPUT
SELECT
TV CONTROL
CH VOL
AUDIO VIDEO
SECONDARY OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
ENTER
10
7
8
4
12
13
1
2
3
5
6
9
11
14
18
20
17
19
21
15
16
22
23
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 10 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
11
En
01
7 VIDEO SELECT – (page 21)
8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY – (page 31)
9 TOP MENU – Press to display the top menu of the BD-
ROM or DVD-Video.
10 ¶/¶/+/~ – Use to select items, change settings
and move the cursor.
ENTER – Press to execute the selected item or enter a
setting that has been changed, etc.
11 HOME MENU – (page 36)
12 > PLAY – (page 24)
H PAUSE – (page 24)
N STOP – (page 24)
mPREV/>NEXT – (page 25)
¬/¬/ – (page 25)
/H/> – (page 25)
13 RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE – Use these to navigate
BD-ROM menus.
14 VIDEO ADJUST – (page 34)
15 ± OPEN/CLOSE – Press to open and close the disc
tray.
16 FL DIMMER – When pressed, the brightness of the
player’s front panel display and the status of the
indicators on the player’s front panel changes.
17 ANGLE – (page 25)
18 OUTPUT RESOLUTION – (page 21)
19 PLAY MODE – (page 28)
20 POP UP MENU/MENU – Press to display the BD-
ROM or DVD-Video menus.
21 DISPLAY – (page 26)
22 TOOLS – (page 20)
23 RETURN – Press to return to the previous
screen.
Front Panel
1 C STANDBY/ON – Press to turn the power on and
off. When the power is on, the indicator is lit.
2 FL OFF indicator – Lights when the player’s front
panel display is turned off pressing FL DIMMER.
3 m/¬ – Press to skip to the beginning of the
previous title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to
start reverse scanning (page 25).
>/> – Press to skip to the beginning of the next
title/chapter/track/file. Press and hold to start forward
scanning (page 25).
H – Press during playback to pause. Press again to
restart playback.
N – Press to stop playback.
When the power is on, the above button indicators are
lit.
4 Remote control sensor – Point the remote control to
this, then operate it within approximately 7 m.
The player may have trouble capturing remote control
signals if there is a fluorescent light nearby. If this
happens, move the player away from the fluorescent
light.
5 Disc tray
6 Blu-ray indicator – Lights when the power is turned
on.
7 ± OPEN/CLOSE – Press to open and close the disc
tray.
8 Front panel display
9 PQLS indicator – (page 14)
10 HDMI indicator – (page 13)
11 > – Press to start playback.
Front
panel
display
Indicators
Front
panel
buttons
Blu-ray PQLS
HDMI
1
1. This lights when an HDMI-compatible device is connected to an
HDMI OUT terminal (page 13).
FL OFF
Bright Lit Bright Lit Lit Off
Medium Lit Bright Lit Lit Off
Dark Lit Dark Lit Lit Off
Off Off Off Off Off Lit
1 11 5 4 2 7 8 6 9 3 10
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 11 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
01
12
En
Front Panel Display
1 > – (page 24)
2 H – (page 24)
3 HD – This lights when an HDMI cable is connected
and video signals are being output with a resolution of
1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i,
1080/60p or 720/60p. It also lights when a component
video cable is connected and video signals are being
output with a resolution of 1080/60i or 720/60p.
4 LAN – (page 17)
5 Character display – Displays the title/chapter/track
number, elapsed time, etc.
6 24HZ/50HZ/60HZ – The frequency of the video frame
or field being output lights.
7 EXT – (page 16)
8 CONTROL – (page 14)
Rear Panel
1 AUDIO OUT terminals – (page 16)
2 VIDEO OUT terminals
VIDEO – (page 16)
COMPONENT VIDEO – (page 16)
3 AC IN – (page 17)
4 CONTROL IN terminal – Use to control this player
from the remote sensor of another Pioneer
component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and
bearing the @ mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT
terminal of the other component to CONTROL IN on
this player using a mini-plug cord (commercially
available).
Caution
• Be sure to connect cables for outputting the audio
and video signals.
• When connected via System Control, point the
remote control toward the connected component
(such as an AV receiver or amplifier). The remote will
not work correctly when pointed at this player.
• You cannot use System Control with components that
do not have a System Control terminal or with
components manufactured by companies other than
Pioneer.
5 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminal – (page 16)
6 HDMI OUT terminal – (page 15)
7 USB (BD STORAGE) port – (page 16)
8 LAN (100) terminal – (page 17)
9 RS-232C terminal – This terminal is not used.
LAN HD
24HZ
50HZ
60HZ
CONTROL
EXT
1
5 6 7 8
2 4 3
AC IN
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
3
8 7 6 5 4
2 1
9
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 12 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
13
En
02
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord
from the power outlet whenever making or changing
connections.
After connecting, make the settings at the Setup
Navigator menu according to the type of cable
connected (page 18).
Also refer to the operating instructions of the device
being connected.
Connecting using an
HDMI cable
The audio and video signals can be transferred to HDMI-
compatible devices as digital signals with no loss of
sound or video quality.
Note
• Make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu
according to connected HDMI-compatible device
(page 18).
• The HDMI indicator on the player’s front panel lights
when an HDMI-compatible device is connected to an
HDMI OUT terminal (page 11).
• 1080p video signals may not be output, depending on
the HDMI cable being used.
About HDMI
This player incorporates High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI™) technology.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
The player supports Deep Color.
The conventional players can transmit a video signal with
8 bit color depth in the YCbCr 4:4:4 or RGB formats, the
players supporting Deep Color can transmit a video
signal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per
color component. Subtle color gradations can be
reproduced when connected to a TV that supports Deep
Color.
This product is compatible with “x.v.Color” that have the
capability to realize a wide-gamut color space based on
the xvYCC specifications.
Playing video signals conforming to “xvYCC” standards
on this player when connected to an “x.v.Color”-
compatible TV, etc., expands color reproduction
capabilities, allowing natural colors to be reproduced
more faithfully than ever.
“x.v.Color” is a promotion name given to the products that
have the capability to realize a wide-gamut color space
based on the international standard specifications
defined as xvYCC.
“x.v.Color”, and are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
+ Audio signals that can be
transferred with the player’s HDMI
OUT terminal
• Dolby TrueHD
• Dolby Digital Plus
• Dolby Digital
• DTS-HD Master Audio
• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
• DTS Digital Surround
• MPEG-2 AAC
• Linear PCM
Linear PCM audio signals meeting the following
conditions can be output:
– Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz
– Number of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz
sampling frequency)
For details, see About the audio output settings on
page 45.
+ About the HDMI High Speed
Transmission
This player outputs 1080/50p, 1080/60p and Deep Color
video signals. If your TV supports 1080/50p, 1080/60p or
Deep Color signals, use a High Speed HDMI™ cable in
order to take advantage of the maximum performance the
player and TV can offer. Also set HDMI High Speed
Transmission to On (page 38).
High Speed HDMI™ cables are tested to carry signals up
to 1080p. 1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i,
1080/60p and 720/60p video signals that are capable of
Deep Color can also be carried.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 13 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
02
14
En
Note
• Set HDMI High Speed Transmission to Off when
using an HDMI cable other than a High Speed
HDMI™ cable (a Standard HDMI™ cable).
• The following restrictions apply when HDMI High
Speed Transmission is set to Off:
– Deep Color signals are not output.
– If the output video resolution is set to Auto, the
signals are output with a resolution of 1080/50i or
1080/60i when TV’s preferred resolution is 1080/50p
or 1080/60p.
– When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i
or 576p/480p, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master
Audio audio signals are output as Dolby Digital,
DTS Digital Surround or linear PCM signals. 96 kHz
or 192 kHz multi-channel audio signals are output
as linear PCM 2-channel audio signals (page 45).
• When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is
connected, it may not operate properly.
+ When connected to a DVI device
• It is not possible to connect DVI devices
(computer displays, for example) that are not
compatible with HDCP. HDCP is a specification to
protect audiovisual content across the DVI/HDMI
interface.
• No audio signals are output. Connect using an audio
cable, etc.
• This player is designed for connection with HDMI-
compatible devices. When connected to a DVI device,
it may not operate properly depending on the DVI
device.
About KURO LINK function
The functions listed below work when a Pioneer KURO
LINK-compatible Flat Screen TV, AV system (AV receiver
or amplifier, etc.) or HD AV Converter is connected to the
player using an HDMI cable.
Functions operated from the TV
Such player operations as starting and stopping playback
and displaying the menus can be performed from the Flat
Screen TV.
Auto-select function
The input switches automatically on the Flat Screen TV,
AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) and HD AV
Converter when playback is started on the player or the
Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed. When
the input is switched, the playback picture, the Home
Menu or Home Media Gallery appears on the Flat Screen
TV.
Simultaneous power function
When playback on the player is started or the Home Menu
or Home Media Gallery is displayed, if the Flat Screen TV’s
power was off, its power turns on automatically. When the
Flat Screen TV’s power is turned off, the player’s power
automatically turns off.
Unified language function
When the language information from a connected Flat
Screen TV is received, you can have the player’s
on-screen display language change automatically to that
of the Flat Screen TV. This function is available only when
playback is stopped and the menu screen is not
displayed.
Caution
• Also refer to the operating instructions of the Flat
Screen TV, AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.)
and HD AV Converter.
Note
• CONTROL on the player’s front panel display lights
when the KURO LINK function is activated (page 12).
+ To use the KURO LINK function
• The KURO LINK function only works when outputting
video signals from the HDMI OUT terminal.
• The KURO LINK function works when KURO LINK is
set to On on the player (page 38).
• The KURO LINK function operates when KURO LINK
is set to On for all devices connected with HDMI
cables. Once connections and the settings of all the
devices are finished, be sure to check that the player’s
picture is output to the Flat Screen TV. (Also check
after changing the connected devices and
reconnecting HDMI cables.) The KURO LINK function
may not operate properly if the player’s picture is not
properly output to the Flat Screen TV.
• Use High Speed HDMI™ cables when using the
KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK function may
not operate properly if other HDMI cables are used.
• For some models, the KURO LINK function may be
referred to as “HDMI Control”.
• The Simultaneous power function is activated when
the player is set as follows (page 38):
Display Power On: On
Display Power Off: On
+ About PQLS function
The PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a transfer
control technology using the KURO LINK function. The
player’s output signals are controlled from the AV
receiver or amplifier to achieve high quality sound
playback using the quartz oscillator of AV receiver or
amplifier. This eliminates the influence of the jitter
generated upon transfer which can adversely affect the
sound quality.
• The player supports the “PQLS 2ch Audio” function
that is only activated when playing audio CDs (CD-
DAs), and the “PQLS Multi Surround” function that is
activated when playing all discs (BDs, DVDs, etc.)
with audio output in linear PCM.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 14 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
15
En
02
• The “PQLS 2ch Audio” function is only activated when
a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the
“PQLS 2ch Audio” function is connected directly to
the player’s HDMI OUT terminal using an HDMI
cable, and when the player is set as follows (page 38):
KURO LINK: On
PQLS: Auto
• The “PQLS Multi Surround” function is only activated
when a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible
with the “PQLS Multi Surround” function is
connected directly to the player’s HDMI OUT
terminal using an HDMI cable, and when the player is
set as follows (page 38):
HDMI Audio Out: PCM
KURO LINK: On
PQLS: Auto
• Also refer to the operating instructions of AV receiver
or amplifier.
• Please see the Pioneer website for AV receivers or
amplifiers that support the PQLS function.
Caution
• If the output video resolution is switched, the PQLS
function may not work. The function will work again
once playback has been stopped then restarted.
Note
• The PQLS indicator on the player’s front panel lights
when the PQLS function is activated (page 12).
+ About connections to components
of other makes supporting the KURO
LINK function
The functions listed below work when a TV or AV system
(AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) supporting the player’s
KURO LINK function is connected to the player using an
HDMI cable. (Depending on your TV or AV system (AV
receiver or amplifier, etc.), it could happen that not all of
the functions will work.)
• Functions operated from the TV
• Auto-select function
• Simultaneous power function
• Unified language function
Please see the Pioneer website for the latest information
on brands and model numbers of other brands that
support the KURO LINK function.
Connecting a TV
See Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier below to
connect an AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable.
Caution
• Hold the plug when connecting and disconnecting
the cable.
• Placing a load on the plug could result in faulty
contact and no video signals being output.
Connecting an AV receiver or
amplifier
Connect to an AV receiver or amplifier in order to enjoy
the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surround. For
instructions on connecting the TV and speakers to the AV
receiver or amplifier, refer to the operating instructions of
AV receiver or amplifier.
Caution
• Hold the plug when connecting and disconnecting
the cable.
• Placing a load on the plug could result in faulty
contact and no video signals being output.
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
Player’s rear panel
TV
Match the direction of
the plug to the terminal
and insert straight.
To HDMI
input terminal
H
D
M
I

c
a
b
l
e

(
c
o
m
m
e
r
c
i
a
l
l
y

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
)
It is also possible to connect to an
AV receiver or amplifier using an
HDMI cable (below).
Direction of signal flow
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
Player’s rear panel
To HDMI
input terminal
From HDMI
output
terminal
AV receiver
or amplifier
To HDMI input
terminal
TV
H
D
M
I

c
a
b
l
e

(
c
o
m
m
e
r
c
i
a
l
l
y

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
)
Match the direction
of the plug to the
terminal and insert
straight.
Direction of signal flow
H
D
M
I

c
a
b
l
e

(
c
o
m
m
e
r
c
i
a
l
l
y

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
)
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 15 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
02
16
En
Connecting video and
audio cables
Note
• Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu
according to the type of cable connected (page 18).
• To output video signals from this player, connect
using one of the following (not including when
connected using an HDMI cable): a component video
cable or a video cable.
Connecting a TV using a
video/audio cable
Caution
• Connect the player’s video output directly to
your TV.
This player supports analog copy protection
technology. Therefore the picture may not be
displayed properly if connected to a TV via a DVD
recorder/video deck or when playing the player’s
output material that is recorded by a DVD recorder/
video deck. Furthermore, the picture may not be
displayed properly due to the copy protection when
the player is connected to a TV with a built-in video
deck. For details, contact the manufacturer of your
TV.
Note
• Video signals are output with a resolution of 576/50i
or 480/60i when connected using a video cable.
• When connected to the TV using a component video
cable, video signals are not output with a resolution of
1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p or 1080/60p.
• Depending on the output video resolution setting, the
picture may not be output (page 21).
Connecting an AV receiver or
amplifier using an optical
digital audio cable
Note
• To switch the video from the AV receiver or amplifier,
also connect the video output terminals.
Connecting components
to the USB port
The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and the
data used with the BONUSVIEW function when playing
BD-ROMs can be stored on a device connected to the
USB port (external storage).
About USB (external storage)
devices
The USB (external storage) devices that can be
connected to the player are as shown below.
• USB 2.0-compatible memory devices or hard disks
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system, minimum 1 GB capacity
(2 GB or more recommended)
Note
• Devices formatted with a file system other than the
above cannot be used. Such devices may however be
usable if they are formatted from the player.
• External storage devices may not be recognized if
they contain multiple partitions.
• Some external storage devices may not operate with
this player.
• Operation of external storage devices (USB memory
devices, external hard disks, etc.) is not guaranteed.
OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
TV
Player’s rear panel
To component
video input terminals
A component cable or
three commercially
available video cables
can be used instead
of the video cable
(yellow plug) of the
included video/audio
cable for connection.
Direction of
signal flow
R
e
d
W
h
i
t
e
It is also possible to
connect to an AV
receiver or amplifier.
Connect the audio
signals using an
optical digital audio
cable or an audio cable
(2 channels) (below).
To video/audio
input terminals
V
i
d
e
o
/
a
u
d
i
o

c
a
b
l
e

(
i
n
c
l
u
d
e
d
)
Y
e
l
l
o
w
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
Player’s rear panel
To audio input
terminals
AV receiver or
amplifier
R
e
d
W
h
i
t
e
Direction of signal flow
2-channel analog
audio can also be
connected.
To optical digital
audio input terminal
Optical digital audio
cable (commercially
available)
Video/audio cable
(included)
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 16 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
17
En
02
Connecting the USB
(external storage) device
Caution
• Be sure to turn the player’s power off before
connecting or disconnecting external storage
devices.
• Use empty external storage devices (on which
nothing is stored).
• When using an external hard disk as the external
storage device, be sure to turn on the hard disk’s
power before turning on the player’s power.
• If the external storage device is write-protected, be
sure to disable the write-protection.
• When connecting the USB cable, hold onto the plug,
set the plug in the proper direction for the port and
insert it horizontally.
• Placing excessive loads on the plug may result in
poor contact, making it impossible to write data on
the external storage device.
• The player is equipped with an internal storage. This
internal storage cannot be used when an external
storage device is connected.
• When a USB memory device or external hard disk is
connected and the player’s power is turned on, do not
unplug the power cord.
Note
• The EXT indicator on the player’s front panel display
lights when data can be stored on the external
storage (page 12).
• Devices may not work if connected to the USB port via
a memory card reader or USB hub.
• Use a USB cable with a length of 2 meters or less.
Network connection
BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie trailers or
additional audio and subtitle languages and playing
on-line games can be enjoyed over the Internet. The
player’s software can also be updated over the Internet
(page 44). Connect an Ethernet hub (or a router with hub
functionality) that is connected to the Internet to the player.
Be sure to use a 100BASE-TX compatible Ethernet hub or
router.
Connecting via an Ethernet hub
The player can be connected to an Ethernet hub using a
LAN cable.
Note
• LAN on the player’s front panel display lights when
there is an active local area network (LAN) connection
(page 12).
• If there is an available DHCP server in your local area
network, the IP address is obtained automatically.
Otherwise, set IP address manually (page 41).
• For some Internet service providers, you may have to
set the individual network configuration manually. In
this case, see page 41.
• Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the
player due to communication error/malfunctions
associated with your network connection and/or your
connected equipment. Please contact your Internet
service provider or network device manufacturer.
Connecting the power
cord
Connect the power cord after all the connections between
devices have been completed.
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
CONTROL
IN
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
USB memory
device, etc. Hard disk, etc.
Player’s rear panel
USB cable
(commercially
available)
LAN(100) HDMI OUT OUTPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL
OUT
OPTICAL
C
Y
R AUDIO VIDEO L
PB PR
RS-232 C
USB
(BD STORAGE)
1
LAN
2 3 WAN
LAN cable
(commercially
available)
Ethernet hub
(router with hub
functionality)
Modem Internet
Player’s rear panel
AC IN
UT
NT VIDEO
CONTROL
IN
VIDEO
PR
Player’s rear panel
Power cord (included)
To wall outlet
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 17 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
03
18
En
Chapter 3
Getting Started
Making settings using
the Setup Navigator
menu
Be sure to perform these settings when using the player
for the first time.
Caution
• Before turning on the power, check that the
connections between the player and other devices are
correct. Also, turn on the power of the devices
connected to the player before turning on the player’s
power.
• When using a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or front
projector compatible with the KURO LINK function,
set KURO LINK to On on the connected device before
turning on the player’s power.
• The screen in step 11 and test tones are output
simultaneously according to the settings in steps 4 to
7. Lower the volume of the devices connected with the
player.
Note
• When a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or front projector
compatible with the KURO LINK function is
connected to the player using an HDMI cable, the
player is automatically set to the optimum picture
quality for the connected device.
1 Turn on the TV’s power and switch the input.
See the TV’s operating instructions for instructions on
operating the TV.
2 Turn on the player’s power.
Press C STANDBY/ON.
Check that the Setup Navigator menu is displayed.
+ If the Setup Navigator menu is not
displayed
r Press HOME MENU to display the Home
Menu, select Initial Setup ¬ Setup Navigator ¬
Start, then press ENTER.
3 Select the OSD language.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Example (U.K. models):
When a Pioneer Flat Screen TV that is compatible with
KURO LINK is connected to this player’s HDMI OUT
terminal, language settings are imported from the
Pioneer Flat Screen TV’s language settings before Setup
Navigator begins.
4 Select and set the video and audio output
terminals.
Select the actually connected video and audio output
terminals.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to select, then press ENTER.
Caution
• When HDMI is selected for Video, no video signals
are output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO
output terminals.
• When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected at
Video, no video signals are output from the HDMI
OUT terminal.
• The video and audio signals output from the set
output terminals are output synchronously (lip
synchronization).
• When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected at
Video, no sound is output if HDMI is selected at
Audio.
Follow the procedure below to redo the connections,
then select the proper connection at the setup
screen.
– When connecting using component video cables
or a video cable to watch the picture, connect to an
AV receiver or amplifier, or a TV using either analog
audio cables, an optical digital audio cable
(page 16).
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
ENTER
Setting item Output terminal name
V
i
d
e
o
HDMI HDMI OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO
A
u
d
i
o
HDMI HDMI OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL OUT
ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO OUT
Setup Navigator
BD PLAYER
Please select the on-screen display language.
Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD-Video menu
language will also be set.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 18 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
19
En
03
– To listen to audio with the player connected to an
AV receiver or amplifier with an HDMI cable,
connect the TV to the AV receiver or amplifier using
an HDMI cable (page 15).
• When HDMI or DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Audio,
linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output
from all terminals other than the ones selected at
Audio.
• When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Audio, no
audio signals are output from the HDMI OUT or
DIGITAL OUT terminals.
For steps 5 to 8, the step to which you should
proceed depends on the combination of the Video
and Audio settings.
5 Select and set the HDMI High Speed Transmission
setting for the HDMI OUT terminal.
Use +/~ to select, then press ENTER.
When HDMI High Speed Transmission for the HDMI
OUT terminal is set to On, use a High Speed HDMI™
cable. The picture and sound may not be output properly
if any other HDMI cable (for example a standard HDMI™
cable) or an HDMI cable with built-in equalizer is used.
6 Select the output video resolution from the
COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
For details on the resolution settings, see Switching the
output video resolution on page 21.
7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
8 Select the PQLS.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Note
• Only when a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier is
connected , PQLS Screen appears.
• The PQLS function works when linear PCM audio
signals are output. Therefore the linear PCM audio
signals obtained by decoding all audio signals are
output from HDMI OUT terminal. For details, see
About the audio output settings on page 45.
• When Use is select, the player is set to the settings
below.
HDMI Audio Out: PCM
KURO LINK: On
PQLS: Auto
• For details on the PQLS function, About PQLS function
on page 14.
9 Check the settings.
Select Proceed, then press ENTER.
10 Output test tones.
Use +/~ to select Yes, then press ENTER.
11 Finish the Setup Navigator menu.
Use +/~ to select Finish, then press ENTER.
To redo the settings from the start, select Go Back.
Depending on the output terminal setting of step 4 or the
HDMI cable being used, it may happen that no picture
and/or sound is output. If this happens, the setup returns
to step 4 if there is no operation for over 30 seconds. Once
the setup returns to step 4, redo the settings according to
the connected devices and the HDMI cable being used.
12 Checking the picture quality settings or setting
the picture quality.
If a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or projector is connected to the
player and HDMI is selected for Video in step 4, the
player sets the picture quality automatically. The
automatic picture quality setting screen appears. Press
ENTER.
When the automatic picture quality setting screen does
not appear, the manual picture quality setting screen
appears. Use ¶/¶ to select the connected component,
then press ENTER.
Operating the TV with
the player’s remote
control
When the manufacturer code for your brand of TV is set
on the player’s remote control, the TV can be operated
using the player’s remote control.
Caution
• For some models it may not be possible to operate the
TV with the player’s remote control, even for TVs of
brands listed on the manufacturer code list.
• The setting may be restored to the default after the
batteries are replaced. If this happens, reset it.
1 Input the 2-digit manufacturer code.
Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the code while
pressing TV CONTROL C.
Note
• The factory setting is 00 (PIONEER).
• If you make a mistake when inputting the code,
release TV CONTROL C then start over from the
beginning.
TV CONTROL
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER
ENTER
INPUT
SELECT
CH VOL
AUDIO VIDEO
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CLEAR
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 19 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
03
20
En
• When there are multiple codes for a manufacturer, try
inputting them in the indicated order until the TV can
be operated.
2 Check that the TV can be operated.
Operate the TV using TV CONTROL.
C – Press to turn the TV’s power on and off.
INPUT SELECT – Press to switch the TV’s input.
CH +/– – Press to select the TV channel.
VOL +/– – Press to adjust the volume.
TV Preset code list
Manufacturer Code(s)
Using the TOOLS menu
Various functions can be called out according to the
player’s operating status.
PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51,
22
ACURA 44
ADMIRAL 31
AIWA 60
AKAI 32, 35, 42
AKURA 41
ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44
AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47
ANITECH 44
ASA 45
ASUKA 41
AUDIOGONIC 07, 36
BASIC LINE 41, 44
BAUR 31, 07, 42
BEKO 38
BEON 07
BLAUPUNKT 31
BLUE SKY 41
BLUE STAR 18
BPL 18
BRANDT 36
BTC 41
BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56
CASCADE 44
CATHAY 07
CENTURION 07
CGB 42
CIMLINE 44
CLARIVOX 07
CLATRONIC 38
CONDOR 38
CONTEC 44
CROSLEY 32
CROWN 38, 44
CRYSTAL 42
CYBERTRON 41
DAEWOO 07, 44, 56
DAINICHI 41
DANSAI 07
DAYTON 44
DECCA 07, 48
DIXI 07, 44
DUMONT 53
ELIN 07
ELITE 41
ELTA 44
EMERSON 42
ERRES 07
FERGUSON 07, 36, 51
FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54
FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54
FIRSTLINE 40, 44
FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45
FORMENTI 32, 07, 42
FRONTECH 31, 42, 46
FRONTECH/PROTECH 32
FUJITSU 48
FUNAI 40, 46, 58
GBC 32, 42
GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17, 02,
28, 18
GEC 07, 34, 48
GELOSO 32, 44
GENERAL 29
GENEXXA 31, 41
GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07, 50
GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56
GORENJE 38
GPM 41
GRAETZ 31, 42
GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48
GRADIENTE 30, 57
GRANDIN 18
GRUNDIG 31, 53
HANSEATIC 07, 42
HCM 18, 44
HINARI 07, 41, 44
HISAWA 18
HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54,
06, 10, 24, 25, 18
HUANYU 56
HYPSON 07, 18, 46
ICE 46, 47
IMPERIAL 38, 42
INDIANA 07
INGELEN 31
INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42
INTERVISION 46, 49
ISUKAI 41
ITC 42
ITT 31, 32, 42
JEC 05
JVC 13, 23
KAISUI 18, 41, 44
KAPSCH 31
KENDO 42
KENNEDY 32, 42
KORPEL 07
KOYODA 44
LEYCO 07, 40, 46, 48
LIESENK&TTER 07
LOEWE 07
LUXOR 32, 42, 43
M-ELECTRONIC 31, 44, 45, 54, 56,
07, 36, 51
MAGNADYNE 32, 49
MAGNAFON 49
MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29
MANESTH 39, 46
MARANTZ 07
MARK 07
MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48
MCMICHAEL 34
MEDIATOR 07
MEMOREX 44
METZ 31
MINERVA 31, 53
MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31
MULTITECH 44, 49
NEC 59
NECKERMANN 31, 07
NEI 07, 42
NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48
NOBLIKO 49
NOKIA 32, 42, 52
NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52
OCEANIC 31, 32, 42
ORION 32, 07, 39, 40
OSAKI 41, 46, 48
OSO 41
OSUME 48
OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42
PALLADIUM 38
PANAMA 46
PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22
PATHO CINEMA 42
PAUSA 44
PHILCO 32, 42
PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68
PHOENIX 32
PHONOLA 07
PROFEX 42, 44
PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49
QUELLE 31, 32, 07, 42, 45, 53
R-LINE 07
RADIOLA 07
RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02
RBM 53
RCA 01, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62,
09
REDIFFUSION 32, 42
REX 31, 46
ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46
SABA 31, 36, 42, 51
SAISHO 39, 44, 46
SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43
SAMBERS 49
SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70
SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14, 91
SBR 07, 34
SCHAUB LORENZ 42
SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47
SEG 42, 46
SEI 32, 40, 49
SELECO 31, 42
SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90
SIAREM 32, 49
SIEMENS 31
SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49
SKANTIC 43
SOLAVOX 31
SONOKO 07, 44
SONOLOR 31, 35
SONTEC 07
SONY 04
SOUNDWAVE 07
STANDARD 41, 44
STERN 31
SUSUMU 41
SYSLINE 07
TANDY 31, 41, 48
TASHIKO 34
TATUNG 07, 48
TEC 42
TELEAVIA 36
TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52
TELETECH 44
TENSAI 40, 41
THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63
THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48
TOMASHI 18
TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53
TOWADA 42
ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49
UNIDEN 92
UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45,
46, 54
VESTEL 07
VICTOR 13
VOXSON 31
WALTHAM 43
WATSON 07
WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07
YOKO 07, 42, 46
ZENITH 03, 20
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
ENTER
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 20 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
21
En
03
1 Display the TOOLS menu.
Press TOOLS.
2 Select and set the item.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Note
• Items that cannot be changed are displayed in gray.
The items that can be selected depend on the player’s
status.
+ To change the setting of the
selected item
Use +/~ to change.
+ To close the TOOLS menu
Press TOOLS or RETURN.
+ TOOLS menu item list
Switching the video
output terminal to be
viewed
Use the procedure below to switch the video output signal
to be viewed between the HDMI OUT terminal and an
analog output terminal (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO
output terminals).
Caution
• The picture may not be displayed for a while when the
video output terminal is switched.
• When the HDMI OUT terminal is selected, no video
signals are output from the other video output
terminals.
• When a video output terminal other than the HDMI
OUT terminal is selected, no audio and video signals
are output from the HDMI OUT terminal.
r Press VIDEO SELECT.
• The current video output terminal is displayed on the
TV screen and on the player’s front panel display.
To switch the video output terminals, press ¶/¶.
• The video output terminal setting can also be
switched by pressing m¬ />> on the
player’s front panel.
Switching the output
video resolution
Use the procedure below to switch the output video
resolution from the various video output terminals.
Caution
• On some devices (TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc.),
the video or audio may not be output properly when
the resolution is switched. If this happens, use
OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set a resolution at which
the video and audio are properly output.
• When video signals are being output with a resolution
of 1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i,
1080/60p or 720/60p from the HDMI OUT terminal or
COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, the picture
may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9, even if the
TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard).
Item Description
Play from Beginning Play the selected title, track or file from
the start.
Slideshow Play a slideshow of the image files on the
selected disc or folder.
Play Mode Display the Play Mode screen (page 28).
Video Adjust Display the picture quality adjustment
screen (page 34).
Secondary Video Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary video
(Picture-in-Picture) (page 26).
Subtitle Switch the subtitles (page 25).
Angle Switch the BD-ROM/DVD-Video disc’s
camera angles (page 25).
Rotate Rotate the image while playing a
slideshow (page 32).
Audio Adjust Display the audio adjustment menu
(page 35).
Audio Switch the audio (page 26).
Secondary Audio Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary audio
(page 26).
Now Playing Display the playback screen of the
currently playing track or file.
Original/Play List Switch the DVD-R/-RW’s (VR format) list
screen between the original list and the
playlist.
Add to HMG Playlist Add the selected track or file to the HMG
Playlist (page 32).
Delete from HMG
Playlist
Delete the selected track or file from the
HMG Playlist (page 33).
Output Video
Resolution
Switch the output video resolution from
the various output terminals (page 21).
Angle
Audio
Subtitle
Audio Adjust
Video Adjust
BD PLAYER
TOOLS
VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
AUDIO VIDEO
SECONDARY OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
HDMI (Source Direct)


Video Output Terminal
Output video resolution setting of
selected video output terminal
Example:
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 21 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
03
22
En
• The picture may not be displayed for a while when the
resolution is switched.
r Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION.
• The current output video resolution setting is
displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front
panel display.
To switch the output video resolution, press OUTPUT
RESOLUTION again or press ¶/¶.
• The output video resolution depends on the video
output terminal (page 23).
• The output video resolution setting can also be
switched by selecting Output Video Resolution
from the TOOLS menu.
+ About the frame/field frequency
and NTSC/PAL TV systems
U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: By factory default
setting, the frame/field frequency is set for an output of
50 Hz, and the video signal output from the VIDEO output
terminals is set to be output in the PAL TV system format.
When sources with a frame/field frequency of 60 Hz or
24 Hz are played, the output frame/field frequency
automatically switches to 60 Hz (or 24 Hz for HDMI,
depending on the setting), and the TV system format for
the video signal output from the VIDEO output terminals
depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting.
Others: By factory default setting, the frame/field
frequency is set for an output of 60 Hz, and the TV system
format for the video signal output from the VIDEO output
terminals depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. When
sources with a frame/field frequency of 50 Hz are played,
the output frame/field frequency automatically switches
to 50 Hz, and the video signal output from the VIDEO
output terminals is set to be output in the PAL TV system
format.
When playback is stopped, the frame/field frequency and
TV system settings remain at the settings last used. The
frame/field frequency and TV system settings do not
change even when the power is turned off. They only
switch when a video material with a different frame/field
frequency is played.
If the picture is not displayed on the TV when a source
with a different frame/field frequency is played, use the
procedure below to switch the frame/field frequency and
TV system settings for the signal output from the player.
Eject the disc, then press the ± OPEN/CLOSE button on
the front panel while pressing the > button to switch to a
different frame/field frequency. The frame/field frequency
switches between 50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this
operation is performed. The indicator for the frame
frequency’s current setting lights on the front panel
display (page 12).
+ About Film material
The film material is a video signal with a frame rate of 24
frames/second. For example, these materials include
1080/24p, 720/24p, etc.
+ To output film material
To output 1080/24p film material from HDMI OUT
terminal, set the output video resolution to either Auto or
Source Direct.
Caution
• 1080/24p signals can only be output from the HDMI
OUT terminal. They cannot be output from other
video terminals.
• When Auto is selected, the picture is output at 60
frames/second if your TV is not compatible with 1080/
24p signals.
• When Source Direct is selected, the signals are
output as such, even if your TV is not compatible with
1080/24p signals. If the picture is not displayed
properly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set an output
video resolution at which the video and audio signals
are properly output.
• Even if Auto or Source Direct is selected, 720/24p
video signals are output at 60 frames/second.
CLEAR ENTER
VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
AUDIO VIDEO
SECONDARY OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
Auto


Output Video Resolution Source : 1080/50i
Current Output : 1080/50i
Video resolution of the
currently playing disc
Output video resolution
from the player
Example:
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 22 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
23
En
03
+ About the output video resolution
The output video resolution setting and the resolution of the picture that is actually output differ for the different
terminals. See the table below. The table below shows the output video resolution for the different terminals when the
frame/field frequency of the playback source is 50 Hz on the upper line, the resolutions when the source’s frame/field
frequency is 60 Hz and 24 Hz on the lower line.
Output
video
resolution
setting
HDMI
1
1. The video output terminal set at Video in the Setup Navigator (page 18) or the video output terminal selected with VIDEO SELECT (page 21).
COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO
1
HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT
VIDEO/VIDEO
output terminals
HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT
VIDEO output
terminals
2
2. Depending on the BD, the pictures may not be output.
VIDEO
output
terminal
2
(TV
system)
Auto
3
3. This cannot be selected when the video output terminal is set to COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO.
Resolution preferred
by TV
4,5,6
4. The pictures are output with the preferred output resolution of the device (TV, AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) connected to HDMI OUT
terminal.
5. For details on the output of film material (1080/24p or 720/24p video signals), see To output film material on page 22.
6. Sources with a resolution of 720/50p, 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/50i or 1080/60i even if the TV’s recommended resolution is
1080/50p or 1080/60p.
No video signals are
output
No video signals are
output
— — —
576i or 480i 576/50i 576/50i 576/50i PAL
480/60i 480/60i 480/60i
*
7
7. Depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting (page 37).
576p or 480p 576/50p 576/50p 576/50i PAL
480/60p 480/60p 480/60i
*
7
1080i 1080/50i 576/50p 576/50i PAL
1080/60i
1080/60i
8,9
8. DVD-Video or DVD-R/-RW (VR format) may be output at 480/60p.
9. BD-ROM or BD-R/-RE may be output at 480/60p.
480/60i
*
7
1080p
3
1080/50p
10,11
10. Depending on the connected HDMI cable, the video signals may not be output.
11. Sources with a resolution of 720/50p, 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/50i or 1080/60i.
— — —
1080/60p
10,11
Source Direct Resolution recorded
on disc
5,12,13
12. Depending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be output.
13. 720/24p film material is output at 720/60p.
Resolution recorded
on disc
9,12,13,14
14. 1080/24p film material is output at 1080/60i.
576/50i PAL
480/60i
*
7
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 23 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
04
24
En
Chapter 4
Playback
Playing discs or files
This section describes the player’s main operations.
For the types of discs that can be played, see Playable
discs on page 7. For the types of files that can be played,
see Playable files on page 9. Video, image and audio files
recorded on discs are played with the Home Media
Gallery (page 31).
1 Press C STANDBY/ON to turn on the power.
Turn the TV’s power on and switch its input beforehand.
2 Press ± OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and
load the disc.
Note
• Load the disc with the printed side facing
up.
• Several dozen seconds are required to read
the disc. Once reading is completed, the
type of disc is displayed on the player’s front
panel display.
3 Press > PLAY to play the disc.
> on the player’s front panel display lights during
playback.
• To pause, press H PAUSE during playback. H on the
player’s front panel display lights when playback is
paused.
• To stop, press N STOP during playback.
Note
• Some discs start playing automatically when the disc
tray is closed.
• DVD-Video discs have parental lock features. Input
the password registered in the player’s settings to
unlock the parental lock. For details, see page 43.
• For some BD-R/-RE, playback protection is set for the
disc or titles. Input the code number set for the disc
to unlock the protection.
• Check Troubleshooting on page 55 if video or audio
signals are not being output properly.
+ If the disc menu is displayed
For some discs, the disc menu is displayed automatically
when playback starts. The contents of the disc menu and
the way to operate differ from disc to disc.
+ Resuming playback from where it
was stopped (resume playback
function)
• When N STOP is pressed during playback, the point
at which the disc stopped is stored in the memory.
When > PLAY is pressed, playback resumes from
that point.
• For audio CDs and audio files, playback starts from
the beginning of the track/file that was playing.
• If the stop mode was set while playing a slideshow of
image files, playback starts from the image file last
displayed.
• To cancel the resume playback function, press
N STOP while playback is stopped.
Note
• The resume playback function is canceled
automatically in the following cases:
– When the disc tray is opened.
– When the file list window is switched.
– When the power is turned off. (For BDs and DVDs
this does not cancel the resume playback
function.)
• The resume playback function cannot be used for
some discs.
TV CONTROL
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER
ENTER
VIDEO SELECT
SECONDARY
PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE
INPUT
SELECT
CH VOL
AUDIO VIDEO
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
ENTER
CLEAR
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 24 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
25
En
04
Forward and reverse
scanning
r During playback, press ¬ or >.
• The scanning speed switches each time the button is
pressed. The speed steps depend on the disc or file
(the speed is displayed on the TV screen).
• Forward or reverse scanning is also possible by
holding the button down. Normal playback resumes
when the button is released.
+ To resume normal playback
r Press > PLAY.
Playing specific titles,
chapters or tracks
r Input the number of the title, chapter or track you
want to play.
• Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number,
then press ENTER.
• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.
Skipping content
r Press mPREV or >NEXT.
• When >NEXT is pressed, the playback skips
ahead to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/
file.
• When mPREV is pressed, the playback skips back
to the beginning of the currently playing title/chapter/
track/file. Press twice to skip back to the beginning of
the previous title/chapter/track/file.
Playing in slow motion
r While playback is paused, press and hold ¬/
or /H.
• The speed switches each time the button is pressed
(the speed is displayed on the TV screen). The speed
steps depend on the disc or file.
+ To resume normal playback
r Press > PLAY.
Step forward and step
reverse
r While playback is paused, press ¬/ or /H.
• The picture moves a step forward or reverse each time
the button is pressed.
+ To resume normal playback
r Press > PLAY.
Switching the camera angles
For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multiple
angles are recorded, the angles can be switched during
playback.
r During playback, press ANGLE.
• The current angle and total number of recorded
angles are displayed on the TV screen and on the
player’s front panel display.
To switch the angles, press ANGLE again or press ¶/
¶.
• The angles can also be switched by selecting Angle
from the TOOLS menu.
• If the angles are not switched when ANGLE is
pressed, switch them from the menu screen.
Switching the subtitles
For discs or files on which multiple subtitles are recorded,
the subtitles can be switched during playback.
Caution
• The subtitles cannot be switched for discs recorded
on a DVD or BD recorder. Also refer to the operating
instructions of the device used for recording.
r During playback, press SUBTITLE.
• The current subtitle and total number of recorded
subtitles are displayed on the TV screen and on the
player’s front panel display.
To switch the subtitle, press SUBTITLE again or press
¶/¶.
• The subtitles can also be switched by selecting
Subtitle from the TOOLS menu.
• If the subtitles are not switched when SUBTITLE is
pressed, switch them from the menu screen.
+ Turning the subtitles off
r Press SUBTITLE, then press CLEAR.
+ About displaying external subtitle
files while playing DivX media files
In addition to the subtitles recorded in DivX media files,
this player also supports the display of external subtitle
files. If a file has the same name as a DivX media file aside
from the file extension and the extension is one of the
extensions listed below, the file is treated as an external
subtitle file. Note that DivX media files and external
1/4

Angle
Example: Current angle/Total number of
recorded angles
1/2 English
Subtitle


Example: Current subtitle/Total number of
recorded subtitles
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 25 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
04
26
En
subtitle files must be located in the same folder.
Only one external subtitle file can be displayed on this
player. Use a computer, etc., to delete any external
subtitle files you do not want to display from the disc.
.srt, .sub, .txt, .smi, .ssa, .ass
If the language code is specified for the external subtitle
file, the subtitles are displayed with the font
corresponding to that language code. If no language
code is specified, the subtitles are displayed with the font
corresponding to the language code set at Subtitle
Language (page 39). The same font is used for the all the
languages in each of the groups below.
Note
• Depending on the file, the external subtitles may not
be displayed properly.
Switching the audio and
secondary audio
For discs or files on which multiple audio streams/
channels are recorded, audio streams/channels can be
switched during playback. Also use this procedure to
switch the secondary audio for BD-ROMs on which
secondary audio is recorded.
r During playback, press AUDIO.
• The current audio and total number of recorded audio
streams are displayed on the TV screen and on the
player’s front panel display.
To switch the audio, press AUDIO again or press ¶/
¶.
• To switch the secondary audio, press SECONDARY
AUDIO.
• The audio/secondary audio can also be switched by
selecting Audio or Secondary Audio from the
TOOLS menu.
• If the audio/secondary audio is not switched when
AUDIO/SECONDARY AUDIO is pressed, switch it
from the menu screen.
+ Turning the Secondary Audio off
r Press SECONDARY AUDIO, then press CLEAR.
Switching the secondary
video
Use the procedure below to switch the secondary video
(Picture-in-Picture) recorded on the BD-ROM.
r During playback, press SECONDARY VIDEO.
• The current secondary video and total number of
recorded secondary video streams are displayed on
the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display.
To switch the secondary video, press SECONDARY
VIDEO again or press ¶/¶.
• The secondary video can also be switched by
selecting Secondary Video from the TOOLS menu.
• If the secondary video is not switched when
SECONDARY VIDEO is pressed, switch it from the
menu screen.
+ Turning the Secondary Video off
r Press SECONDARY VIDEO, then press CLEAR.
Displaying the disc
information
r Press DISPLAY.
The disc information appears on the TV screen. The
information switches each time the button is pressed.
The information display differs during playback and when
playback is stopped.
Group 1 Afrikaans(af/afr), Basque(eu/eus), Catalan(ca/cat),
Danish(da/dan), Dutch(nl/nld), English(en/eng),
Faroese(fo/fao), Finnish(fi/fin), French(fr/fra), Galician(gl/
glg), German(de/deu), Guarani(gn/grn), Icelandic(is/isl),
Irish(ga/gle), Italian(it/ita), Latin(la/lat), Norwegian(no/
nor), Portuguese(pt/por), Rhaeto-Romance(rm/roh),
Scots-Gaelic(gd/gla), Spanish(es/spa), Swahili(sw/swa),
Swedish(sv/swe), Zulu(zu/zul)
Group 2 Albanian(sq/sqi), Croatian(hr/hrv), Czech(cs/ces),
Hungarian(hu/hun), Polish(pl/pol), Romanian(ro/ron),
Slovak(sk/slk), Slovenian(sl/slv)
Group 3 Belarusian(be/bel), Bulgarian(bg/bul), Macedonian(mk/
mkd), Moldavian(mo/mol), Russian(ru/rus), Serbian(sr/
srp), Ukrainian(uk/ukr)
Group 4 Greek(el/ell)
Group 5 Estonian(et/est), Kurdish(ku/kur), Turkish(tr/tur)
2/2 English
Dolby True HD 96kHz 7.1ch L C R Ls Rs Lb Rb LFE
Audio

Current audio/Total number of
recorded audio streams
Example:
Audio type Number of
channels
Channels recorded
on disc
1/4
Secondary Video

Example: Current secondary video/Total number of
recorded secondary video streams
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 26 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
27
En
04
Playback functions
The functions that can be used differ according to the type of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot
be used. Check the usable functions on the table below.
Function
1
1. Some functions may not work for some discs or files, even if indicated [v] on the table.
Disc/file type
BD-
ROM
BD-R
/-RE
DVD-
Video
DVD-R
/-RW
(VR
format)
AVCHD
Video
file
Image
file
Audio
file
Audio
CD
Forward and reverse scanning
2
2. For some discs, normal playback resumes automatically when the chapter switches.
v
3
3. No sound is produced during forward and reverse scanning.
v
3
v
3
v
3
v
3
v
3
X
v
4
4. Sound is produced during forward and reverse scanning.
v
4
Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks v v v v v X X X v
Skipping content v v v v v v v v v
Playing in slow motion
2,5
5. • No sound is output during slow motion playback.
• It is not possible to switch the speed during reverse slow motion playback.
v v v v v
v
6
6. Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.
X X X
Step forward and step reverse
2
v v v v v
v
7
7. Reverse step playback is not possible.
X X X
Switching the camera angles
8
8. Angle mark is displayed for scenes at which multiple angles are recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On (page 39).
v X v X X X X X X
Switching the subtitles
9
9. • The types of recorded subtitles depend on the disc and file.
• In some cases the subtitle may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the current
subtitle or the total number of subtitles recorded on the disc being displayed.
v v v v v v X X X
Switching the audio
10
10. The types of recorded audio streams depend on the disc and file.
v v v v v v X X v
Switching the secondary audio
11
11. • The types of recorded secondary audio streams depend on the disc and file.
• In some cases the secondary audio may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the
current secondary audio or the total number of secondary audio streams recorded on the disc being displayed.
• Secondary audio mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary audio is recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On
(page 39).
v
12
12. Some discs do not include secondary audio.
X X X X X X X X
Switching the secondary video
13
13. • In some cases the secondary video may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the
current secondary video or the total number of secondary video streams recorded on the disc being displayed.
• Secondary video mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary video is recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On
(page 39).
v
14
14. Some discs do not include secondary video.
X X X X X X X X
Displaying the disc information v v v v v v v X X
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 27 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
04
28
En
Using the Play Mode
functions
Playing from a specific time
(Time Search)
1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the
Play Mode screen.
The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting
Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select Time Search.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Input the time.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the time.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
• To play from 45 minutes, input 0, 0, 4, 5, 0 and 0, then
press ENTER.
• To play from 1 hour 20 minutes, input 0, 1, 2, 0, 0 and
0, then press ENTER.
• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.
4 Starting playback from the specified time.
Use +/~ to select Search, then press ENTER.
+ Closing the Play Mode screen
Press PLAY MODE or HOME MENU.
Playing a specific title,
chapter or track (Search)
1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode
screen.
The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting
Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select the type of search.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
See the table on page 30 for the search types.
3 Input the number.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
• To search for title 32, input 0, 3 and 2, then press
ENTER.
• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.
4 Starting playback from the specified title, chapter
or track.
Use +/~ to select Search, then press ENTER.
Playing a specific section
within a title or track
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
Use this procedure to play a specific section within a title
or track repeatedly.
1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the
Play Mode screen.
The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting
Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select A-B Repeat.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the starting point for A-B Repeat.
Use +/~ to select A (Start), then press ENTER.
4 Select the end point for A-B Repeat.
Use +/~ to select B (End), then press ENTER.
A-B Repeat playback starts.
+ To cancel A-B Repeat play
• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then
press ENTER.
• During playback, press N STOP or CLEAR.
VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
AUDIO VIDEO
SECONDARY OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CLEAR ENTER
ENTER
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
Time Search 1 2 : 4 5 : 0 0 Search
Title Search 0 3 2 Title Search
A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 28 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
29
En
04
Note
• A-B Repeat play is canceled in the following cases:
– When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-
Video discs only).
– When you search outside the repeat range.
– When you start other Repeat Play or Random Play.
Playing repeatedly
(Repeat Play)
Use this procedure to play the currently playing disc, title,
chapter, track or file repeatedly.
1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the
Play Mode screen.
The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting
Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select Repeat/Random.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the type of Repeat Play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
See the table on page 30 for the types of Repeat Play.
+ To cancel Repeat Play
• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then
press ENTER.
• During playback, press N STOP or CLEAR.
Note
• The type of repeat modes depends on the disc and file
being played. See the table on page 30.
• Repeat Play is canceled in the following cases:
– When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-
Video discs only).
– When you search outside the repeat range.
– When you start other Repeat Play or Random Play.
Playing in random order
(Random Play)
Use this procedure to play the tracks or files in random
order.
1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the
Play Mode screen.
The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting
Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select Repeat/Random.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the Random Play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
+ To cancel Random Play
• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then
press ENTER.
• During playback, press N STOP or CLEAR.
Note
• Random Play is canceled in the following cases:
– When you use the search function.
– When you start Repeat Play.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 29 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
04
30
En
About Play Mode types
The functions that can be used differ according to the type of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot
be used. Check the usable functions on the table below.
Play Mode type
Mark
1
1. The type of Play Mode is indicated by the mark.
Disc/file type
BD-
ROM
2
2. For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the functions cannot be used with some titles.
BD-R
/-RE
DVD-
Video
2
DVD-R
/-RW
(VR
format)
AVCHD
Video
file
Image
file
Audio
file
Audio
CD
R
e
p
e
a
t

P
l
a
y
Playing a specific section
within a title or track
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
v v v v v v X X v
Playing a title repeatedly
(Title Repeat)
v v v v v v X X X
Playing a chapter repeatedly
(Chapter Repeat)
v v v v v X X X X
Playing a track or file
repeatedly (Track Repeat)
X X X X X X X v v
Playing all the titles, tracks
or files on the disc
repeatedly (All Repeat)
X v X
v
3
3. The original titles are played repeatedly. However, the playlist titles cannot be played repeatedly.
X
v
4
4. The files in the folder are played repeatedly.
v
4
v
5
5. The files in the folder or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly.
v
6
6. The tracks in the disc or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly.
R
a
n
d
o
m

P
l
a
y
Playing the tracks or files in
random order
(Random Track/File) X X X X X X v v v
S
e
a
r
c
h
Playing from a specific time
(Time Search)
— v v v v v v X X v
Playing a specific title
(Title Search)
— v v v v v X X X X
Playing a specific chapter
(Chapter Search)
— v v v v v X X X X
Playing a specific track
(Track Search)
— X X X X X X X X v
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 30 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
31
En
04 Playing from the
Home Media Gallery
The Home Media Gallery lets you display a list of the titles,
tracks or files recorded on the disc. The discs that can be
played from the Home Media Gallery are as shown below
(see also page 7).
• BD-R/-RE discs
• DVD-R/-RW (VR format) discs
• Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs)
• DVDs/CDs on which only data files of video, image or
audio files, etc. are recorded
Playing discs
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu
then pressing ENTER.
2 Select the disc.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the title or track to be played.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Playback starts.
+ Closing the Home Media Gallery
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY or HOME MENU.
Note
• When playing an audio CD (CD-DA or DTS-CD), the
Now Playing screen is displayed.
• Some BD-R/-RE discs have playback protection. To
cancel the protection, input the password set for the
disc.
• To play DVD-R/-RW (VR format) playlists, switch to the
playlist using the Original/Play List command on the
TOOLS menu (page 20).
Playing video files
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then
pressing ENTER.
2 Select the disc.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select Movies.
Use ¶/¶ to select Movies, then press ENTER.
4 Select Folders or All Movies.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
• Folders – The files in the selected folder are
displayed.
• All Movies – All the recorded files are displayed.
If you have selected All Movies, proceed to step 6.
5 Select the folder containing the file you want to
play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is
displayed.
6 Select and set the file you want to play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected file, and continues until
the end of the list is reached. Use m/> to play the
previous or next file.
Note
• It may take a few seconds before playback starts. This
is normal.
• It may not be possible to play some files properly.
• The number of views may be restricted (page 9).
Playing image files
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu
then pressing ENTER.
2 Select the disc.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
ENTER
TV CONTROL
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER
INPUT
SELECT
CH VOL
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
BD-R BDAV
My Favorite TV Program
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10 items
Morning serial drama
News at noon
Evening movie
Midnight variety show
Playback protection
World heritage
Drama: Blank time
Music and us
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 31 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
04
32
En
3 Select Photos.
Use ¶/¶ to select Photos, then press ENTER.
4 Select Folders or All Photos.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
• Folders – The files in the selected folder are
displayed.
• All Photos – All the recorded files are displayed.
If you have selected All Photos, proceed to step 6.
5 Select the folder containing the file you want to
play.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to select, then press ENTER.
A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is
displayed.
6 Select and set the file you want to play.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to select, then press ENTER.
A slideshow starts from the selected file, and continues
until the end of the list is reached. Use m/> to display
the previous or next file.
+ About Slideshow
A display of the files on the disc or in the folder that
switches automatically.
+ Rotating images
r Press ANGLE while playing a slideshow.
• The image rotates each time the button is pressed
(90° ¬ 180° ¬ 270° ¬ 0° ¬ ... ).
The image can also be rotated by selecting Rotate from
the TOOLS menu.
Playing audio files
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu
then pressing ENTER.
2 Select the disc.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select Music.
Use ¶/¶ to select Music, then press ENTER.
4 Select Folders or All Songs.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
• Folders – The files in the selected folder are
displayed.
• All Songs – All the recorded files are displayed.
If you have selected All Songs, proceed to step 6.
5 Select the folder containing the file you want to
play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is
displayed.
6 Select and set the file you want to play.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected file, and continues until
the end of the list is reached. Use m/> to play the
previous or next file. The Now Playing screen (shown
below) is displayed.
Playing in the desired order
(HMG Playlist)
The discs that can add tracks and files to the HMG (Home
Media Gallery) Playlist are as shown below.
• Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs)
• DVDs/CDs on which audio files are recorded
+ Adding tracks/files
Use this procedure to add tracks and files, and create the
HMG Playlist.
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu
pressing ENTER.
2 Select the disc.
Load the disc beforehand.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the track/file to be added.
Use ¶/¶ to select.
4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu.
My Folder
DVD-RW/Photos/Folders
99 items
Music 001.mp3
DATA DISC
0.05.34 0.02.33 Play
Currently playing
file
Total file playing
time
Elapsed time
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 32 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
33
En
04
5 Select Add to HMG Playlist.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
The track or file selected in step 3 is added to the HMG Playlist.
To add more tracks or files, repeat steps 3 to 5.
+ To add the currently playing track/
file to the HMG Playlist
1 While the track/file is playing, press TOOLS
to display the TOOLS menu.
2 Use ¶/¶ to select Add to HMG Playlist, then
press ENTER.
Note
• A maximum of 24 tracks/files can be added to the
HMG Playlist.
• The HMG Playlist is cleared in the following cases:
– When the power is turned off.
– When the disc tray is opened.
+ Playing the HMG Playlist
1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the
Home Media Gallery.
The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by
selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu
pressing ENTER.
2 Select HMG Playlist.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the track/file to be played.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected track/file, and
continues until the end of the list is reached. Use m/
> to play the previous or next track/file. The Now
Playing screen (shown below) is displayed.
+ Deleting tracks/files from the HMG
Playlist
1 Select the track/file to be deleted, then press
TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu.
2 Use ¶/¶ to select Delete from HMG Playlist, then
press ENTER.
Folders
CD-ROM/Music
15Items
Music001.mp3
Music002.mp3
Music003.mp3
Music004.mp3
Music005.mp3
Music006.mp3
Music007.mp3
Music008.mp3
Play from Beginning
Add to HMG Playlist
Now Playing
BD PLAYER
TOOLS
Music 001.mp3
DATA DISC
0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HMG
Currently playing
track/file
Total track/file
playing time
Elapsed time
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 33 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
05
34
En
Chapter 5
Adjusting audio and video
Adjusting the video
The quality of the playback picture can be adjusted
according to the TV you are using.
1 During playback, press VIDEO ADJUST to display
the Video Adjust screen.
The Video Adjust screen can also be displayed by
selecting Video Adjust from the TOOLS menu.
2 Select a preset.
Select using +/~ according to the TV being used.
• Pioneer PDP – Select this when connected to a
Pioneer plasma TV.
• Pioneer LCD – Select this when connected to a
Pioneer liquid crystal display TV.
• Pioneer Projector – Select this when connected to a
Pioneer front projector.
• PDP – Select this when connected to a plasma TV of
another brand.
• LCD – Select this when connected to a liquid crystal
display of another brand.
• Projector – Select this when connected to a front
projector of another brand.
• Professional – With this setting, video signal
processing is restrained. Select this when connected
to a professional monitor.
• Memory1 to 3 – Picture quality settings with
adjusted parameters can be stored in the memory.
For a description of the parameters, see When
Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected below.
+ When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected
1 Select Adjustments.
Use ¶ to select Adjustments, then press ENTER.
A detailed settings screen appears.
2 Select the item to be adjusted.
Use ¶/¶ to select.
3 Adjust the picture quality.
When +/~ are pressed, the adjustments can be made
viewing the picture. The detailed settings screen
reappears when ENTER is pressed.
• Prog.Motion – Adjust according to the type of image
(moving or still image). This is effective mainly when
outputting video materials as progressive images.
• Pure Cinema – This setting optimizes the operation of
the progressive scanning circuit for playing film
materials. Normally set it to Auto1. If the picture
seems unnatural, switch this to Auto 2, On or Off
(page 35).
• YNR – Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
• CNR – Reduces noise in the chroma (C) signal.
• BNR – Reduces the block noise (block-shaped
distortion generated upon MPEG compression).
• MNR – Reduces the mosquito noise (distortion along
the contours of the picture generated upon MPEG
compression).
• Detail – Adjusts the picture’s contours.
• White Level – Adjusts the level of the white portions.
• Black Level – Adjusts the level of the black portions.
• Black Setup – Select the black level as the setup level.
Normally select 0 IRE. If the black is too dense and all
the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black due
to the combination with the connected TV, select 7.5
IRE.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts how the dark portions
of the picture look.
• Hue – Adjusts the balance between green and red.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts the density of the colors.
Note
• Prog.Motion and Pure Cinema have the effect only
for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format
(576i/480i or 1080i signals).
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE
VIDEO ADJUST
ENTER
Adjustments
Video Adjust
PDP
Prog. Motion
Pure Cinema
YNR
CNR
BNR
MNR
Detail
White Level
Video Adjust [ Memory1 ]
Motion Still
Auto1
Off Max
Off Max
Off Max
Off Max
Soft Fine
Min Max
Motion Still Prog. Motion
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 34 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
35
En
05
• Prog.Motion is disabled when Pure Cinema is set to
On.
• Black Setup has the effect only for pictures output
from the VIDEO output terminals, and for NTSC
signals output.
• YNR, CNR, BNR and MNR have no effect on 1080/24p
video signals output from the HDMI OUT terminal.
+ Closing the Video Adjust screen
Press HOME MENU.
+ About Pure Cinema
There are two types of video signals:
• Video material – Video signals recorded at 25 or 30
frames/second
• Film material – Video signals recorded at 24 frames/
second
“Pure Cinema” uses signal processing suited for “film
material” when converting 576i/480i or 1080i interlaced
video signals into progressive video signals, resulting in
clear picture reproduction without losing the quality of
the material.
is displayed on the disc information screen when
playing the “film material” pictures of BD-ROM, BD-R/-RE
and DVD-Video discs (page 26).
Adjusting the audio
Adjusting the Audio DRC
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) has the effect of
playing loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. Adjust
the setting for example when viewing movies late at night
and the dialogs are difficult to hear.
1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu.
Press TOOLS.
2 Select and set Audio Adjust.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select and set Audio DRC.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
4 Adjust the setting.
Use +/~ to switch between Off, Low, Medium, High
and Auto.
+ Closing the Audio DRC screen
Press ENTER or HOME MENU.
Note
• This only affects the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
and Dolby Digital audio signals of BDs, DVDs and
video files.
• When Auto is selected, the setting has the same
effect as High or Off for Dolby TrueHD signals,
depending on the content. For Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby Digital, the setting has the same effect as Off.
• Audio DRC affects the audio signals output from the
following audio output terminals:
– Analog audio signals output from the AUDIO OUT
terminals.
– Linear PCM audio signals output from the DIGITAL
OUT terminal or HDMI OUT terminal.
• The effect may be weak for some discs.
Adjusting the audio delay
(Lip Sync)
Adjust the audio delay for the selected video output
terminal if the video and audio are not synchronized.
1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu.
Press TOOLS.
2 Select and set Audio Adjust.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select and set Lip Sync.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
4 Select Auto or Manual.
Use +/~ to select.
• Auto – The player automatically adjusts the timing of
the video and audio when connected to a device
equipped with the HDMI Auto Lipsync Correction
feature using an HDMI cable.
• Manual – Adjust manually while viewing the video.
If you have selected Manual, proceed to step 5.
5 Adjusting the amount of audio delay.
Press ¶, then use +/~ to adjust.
The audio delay can be adjusted from 0 to 250 ms in steps
of 5 ms.
Note
• The Lip Sync adjustment is only applicable to the
output terminal set at Output Terminal (page 43).
• The sound may be interrupted while setting the delay.
+ Closing the Lip Sync screen
Press ENTER or HOME MENU.
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
ENTER
Lip Sync
Manual
100 ms
0 50 150 100 200 250
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 35 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
36
En
Chapter 6
Advanced settings
Changing the settings
Operating the Initial Setup
screen
1 When playback is stopped, display the Home
Menu screen.
Press HOME MENU.
2 Select and set Initial Setup.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select the item and change the setting.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to select, then press ENTER.
Example (U.K. models):
+ Closing the Initial Setup screen
Press HOME MENU.
VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE
HOME MEDIA
GALLERY
MENU
DISPLAY POPUP MENU
TOP MENU TOOLS
HOME
MENU RETURN
AUDIO VIDEO
SECONDARY OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CLEAR ENTER
ENTER
PLAY
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT
16:9 (Widescreen)
Full
Letter Box
On
Initial Setup
BD PLAYER
TV Aspect Ratio
4:3 Video Out
DVD 16:9 Video Out
NTSC on PAL TV
Video Out
Audio Out
HDMI
Network
Language
Playback
Data Management
Setup Navigator
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 36 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
37
En
06
Note
• Items that cannot be changed are indicated in gray. The items that can be selected depend on the player’s status.
• In Options, the factory default settings are indicated in bold.
Setting Options Explanation
V
i
d
e
o

O
u
t
TV Aspect Ratio 16:9 (Widescreen) Select this when connected to a wide (16:9) TV.
4:3 (Standard) Select this when connected to a conventional TV.
4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 pictures are displayed over the entire screen.
Normal 4:3 pictures are displayed with vertical black bars along the sides. Select this
when you cannot switch the aspect ratio to 4:3 on the TV.
4:3 Video Out is only valid when TV Aspect Ratio is set to16:9 (Widescreen).
DVD 16:9 Video Out Letter Box 16:9 pictures are displayed with black bars at the top and bottom when
viewing on a 4:3 screen.
Pan & Scan The picture is displayed over the entire screen, with the left and right sides of
the 16:9 picture cropped. Select this to view 4:3 pictures over the entire
screen. For some discs, the picture will be displayed in the Letter Box mode
even if Pan & Scan is set.
• DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard).
• DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when playing 16:9 pictures of DVD-Video or DVD-R/-RW (VR format) discs. When other 16:9
pictures are played, they are output in the Letter Box mode.
NTSC on PAL TV On Select this when connected to a PAL-only TV. The picture is displayed
correctly on the PAL-only TV even when playing a source with a frame/field
rate other than 50 Hz.
Off Select this when connected to an NTSC-compatible TV.
• The factory default setting is On for U.K. models, Off for other models.
• Many recent PAL TVs support the input of NTSC signals, in which case this can be set to Off. Also check your TV’s operating
instructions.
A
u
d
i
o

O
u
t
Dolby Digital Out
* Only valid for the DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digital audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the secondary audio
and interactive audio are mixed for output.
Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digital audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the signals are output
without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals.
Dolby Digital ¬
PCM
Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not
compatible with Dolby Digital audio signals. The Dolby Digital audio signals
are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output.
DTS Out
* Only valid for the DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
DTS 1 DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the
secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output.
DTS 2 DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the signals
are output without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals.
DTS ¬ PCM Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not
compatible with DTS Digital Surround audio signals. The DTS Digital
Surround audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for
output.
AAC Out
* Only valid for the DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
AAC Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible
with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio signals are output.
AAC ¬ PCM Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not
compatible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio signals are converted into
linear PCM audio signals for output.
DTS Downmix Stereo DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or
DTS Digital Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals
are converted into 2-channel (stereo) signals for output.
Lt/Rt DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or
DTS Digital Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals
are converted into 2-channel signals compatible with Dolby Surround for
output (when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible with
Dolby Pro Logic, the AV receiver or amplifier outputs the linear PCM audio
signals as surround audio signals).
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 37 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
38
En
H
D
M
I
HDMI High Speed
Transmission
On Select this when connected with a High Speed HDMI™ cable (page 13).
Off Select this when connected with a Standard HDMI™ cable (page 13).
The player’s setting screen is closed if the output video resolution is switched by changing the HDMI High Speed Transmission
setting.
HDMI Color Space Auto Select this to automatically switch the video output between YCbCr and RGB
signals according to the connected equipment.
YCbCr 4:4:4 Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:4:4 signals.
YCbCr 4:2:2 Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:2:2 signals.
RGB (16 to 235) Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the
colors seem too dense and all the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black
when RGB (0 to 255) is selected.
RGB (0 to 255) Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the
colors seem too faint and the black seems too bright when RGB (16 to 235)
is selected.
Normally it is recommended to set this to Auto. When set to Auto, the optimum video signals for your TV are output.
HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals are output with as many audio channels as possible. In cases
when the number of channels does not decrease when the signals are output
as such without converting them to linear PCM, they are output as such
(page 45).
PCM Select this when you want the secondary audio and interactive audio signals
to be mixed for output or when you want to output prioritizing sampling
frequency over the number of channels (page 45).
Off Select this when you do not want to output the audio from the HDMI output
terminal.
KURO LINK On Select this to control the player with the remote control of the AV device
connected using an HDMI cable. Also refer to About KURO LINK function on
page 14.
Off Select this when you do not want to control the player with the remote control
of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable.
Display Power On
* Only valid when KURO
LINK is set to On.
On Select this when you want the TV to turn on each time playback is started or
the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed on the player.
Off Select this when you do not want the TV to turn on each time playback is
started or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed on the player.
Display Power Off
* Only valid when KURO
LINK is set to On.
On Select this when you want the player’s power to turn off together with the TV’s
power.
Off Select this when you do not want the player’s power to turn off together with
the TV’s power.
PQLS
* Only valid when KURO
LINK is set to On.
Auto Enables PQLS function (page 14).
Off Disables PQLS function (page 14).
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
IP Address Select this to set the IP address of the player and DNS server (page 41).
Proxy Server Only set the proxy server if so instructed by your Internet service provider (page 41).
Display Network
Configuration
Select this to display a list of the network settings (page 41).
Connection Test Select this to test the network connection (page 42).
Setting Options Explanation
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 38 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
39
En
06
L
a
n
g
u
a
g
e
OSD Language English Select this to set the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages Choose a language for the on-screen displays from the listed languages.
Audio Language
* For some discs, it may not
be possible to change to the
selected language.
English Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Video default audio language to
English.
available languages Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default audio
language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback.
Other Continue to the next screen to set the default audio language for BD-ROM
and DVD-Video playback. You can select the language name or enter the
code number (see on page 47 for the code table).
If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.
Subtitle Language
* For some discs, it may not
be possible to change to the
selected language.
English Select this to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video
playback to English.
available languages Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default subtitle
language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback.
Other Continue to the next screen to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM
and DVD-Video playback. You can select the language name or enter the
code number (see on page 47 for the code table).
If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.
BDMV/DVD-Video Menu
Lang.
* For some discs, it may not
be possible to change to the
selected language.
w/Subtitle
Language
Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus to the same as that set
for the subtitle language.
available languages Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default language for
BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus.
Other Continue to the next screen to set the default menu language for BD-ROM
and DVD-Video menus. You can select the language name or enter the code
number (see on page 47 for the code table).
If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.
Subtitle Display On Select this to display the subtitles.
Off Select this if you do not want to display the subtitles. Note that on some discs
the subtitles are displayed by force.
P
l
a
y
b
a
c
k
Still Picture Field This eliminates instability of the picture when playback is paused.
Frame This makes pictures clear when playback is paused, but instability may be
observed.
Auto Field or Frame is switched automatically according to the disc or file being
played.
Angle/Secondary Indicator On Select this to display the angle mark, secondary video mark and secondary
audio mark on the TV screen (pages 25 and 26).
Off Select this if you do not want to display the angle mark, secondary video mark
and secondary audio mark on the TV screen.
DivX VOD Registration Code Displays the player’s registration code required to play DivX VOD files
(page 9).
Hybrid Disc Playback BD The BD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD or CD) is
played.
DVD The DVD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD) is played.
If there is no DVD layer, the BD layer is played.
CD The CD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and CD) is played. If
there is no CD layer, the BD layer is played.
Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting.
BDMV/BDAV Playback
Priority
BDMV Select this to play the BDMV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both
BDMV and BDAV formats.
BDAV Select this to play the BDAV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both
BDMV and BDAV formats.
Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting.
Setting Options Explanation
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 39 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
40
En
D
a
t
a

M
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
Individual/Shared Data
Erase
Use this to display the list of data used for the BD-LIVE and BONUSVIEW functions and to erase the
data (page 42).
Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting.
Application Data Erase Use this to erase bookmarks, high scores of games and other data (page 42).
Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting.
Storage Format Select this to format the storage device on which the data used by the BD-LIVE and BONUSVIEW
functions is stored (page 42).
Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting.
Setup Navigator Start making the settings using the Setup Navigator menu. For details, see Making settings using
the Setup Navigator menu on page 18.
P
a
r
e
n
t
a
l

L
o
c
k
Set Password (Change
Password)
Register (change) the password for parental lock settings or for unlocking to play DVD-Video with
parental lock feature (page 43).
DVD-Video Parental Lock Change the player’s parental lock level (page 43).
BDMV Parental Lock Change the restricted age (page 43).
Country Code Change the Country/Area code (page 43).
O
p
t
i
o
n
s
Output Terminal Set the terminals from which the player’s video and audio signals are to be output (page 43).
On Screen Display On Select this to display the operation indicators (Play, Stop, etc.) on the TV
screen.
Off Select this if you do not want to display the operation indicators (Play, Stop,
etc.) on the TV screen.
Screen Saver On The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1
minute after playback is stopped or paused.
The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1
minute after the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed while
playing a BD or DVD.
With audio CDs and audio files, the screen saver is automatically activated if
no button is operated for over 1 minute, even while the audio CD or audio file
is playing.
The screen saver turns off when an operation is performed on the player or
remote control.
Off The screen saver is not activated.
Auto Power Off On Select this to turn the power off automatically (the power turns off
automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes).
Off Select this if you do not want the power to turn off automatically.
Software Update The Software Update function can check for and download updated system software from the
network server (page 44).
Setting Options Explanation
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 40 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
41
En
06
+ Setting the IP address
1 Select and set Network ¬ IP Address ¬ Next
Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Set IP address.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to set the IP address of the player or DNS
server, then press ENTER.
• Auto Set IP Address
On – The player’s IP address is obtained
automatically. Select this when using a broadband
router or broadband modem that has a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. This player’s IP address will automatically
be allocated from the DHCP server.
Off – The player’s IP address must be set manually.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the IP
address, subnet mask and default gateway.
• Auto Set DNS Server Address
On – The DNS server’s IP address is obtained
automatically.
Off – The DNS server’s IP address must be set
manually. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the
DNS server’s IP address stipulated by your Internet
service provider.
Note
• When Auto Set IP Address is set to Off, Auto Set
DNS Server Address is also set to Off.
• For information on DHCP server function, refer to the
network device’s operating instructions.
• You may need to contact your Internet service
provider or network administrator when inputting the
IP address manually.
+ Setting the proxy server
Only set the proxy server if so instructed by your Internet
service provider.
1 Select and set Network ¬ Proxy Server ¬ Next
Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Select and set Use or Not use at Proxy Server.
Use +/~ to change, then press ¶.
• Use – Select this when using a proxy server.
• Not use – Select this when not using a proxy server.
If you have selected Use, proceed to step 3.
3 Select and set Server Select Method.
Use +/~ to change, then press ¶.
• IP Address – Input the IP address.
• Server Name – Input the server name.
4 Input IP Address or Server Name.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number if you
select IP address by step 3. Use +/~ to move the cursor.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input characters if you
select Server Name by step 3.
The characters that can be input for the server name are
listed on the table below. Pressing a button repeatedly
cycles through the characters shown.
• If you want to enter two characters in succession that
are both on the same button (for example a P and an
R), press ~ after inputting the first character then
input the second character.
• Use CLEAR to delete the last character.
• Use +/~ to move the displayed characters when all
the input characters cannot be displayed.
5 Input Port Number.
Press ¶, use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the
number.
6 Press ENTER to set.
+ Displaying the network settings
r Select and set Network ¬ Display Network
Configuration ¬ Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
IP Address
Auto Set IP Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Auto Set DNS Server Address
DNS Server (Primary)
DNS Server (Secondary)
Off
Network
BD PLAYER
Off 
Key Characters Key Characters
1 1 . – 6 m n o 6
2 a b c 2 7 p q r s 7
3 d e f 3 8 t u v 8
4 g h i 4 9 w x y z 9
5 j k l 5 0 0
Use 
Proxy Server
Proxy Server
Server Select Method
Server Name
Port Number
Server Name
Network
BD PLAYER
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 41 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
42
En
The MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway and DNS server (primary and secondary)
settings are displayed.
When Auto Set IP Address is set to On, the values
obtained automatically are displayed.
Note
• “0.0.0.0” is displayed when each IP address has not
been set.
+ Testing the network connection
r Select and set Network ¬ Connection Test ¬
Start.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
“Network connection test completed successfully.” is
displayed once the test is completed. If any other
message is displayed, check the connections and/or
settings (pages 17 and 41).
+ Changing to other language at
language setting
1 Select and set Language.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Select and set Audio Language, Subtitle
Language or BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select and set Other.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
4 Change the language.
Use +/~ to change, then press ENTER.
• The language can also be changed using the number
buttons. Use ¶/¶ to move the cursor to Number,
use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number,
then press ENTER. Refer to Language Code Table and
Country/Area Code Table on page 47.
Note
• If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one
of the recorded languages is automatically selected
and played.
+ Erasing data that has been added to
BDs and application data
Use this procedure to erase data that has been added to
BDs (data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and
data used with the BONUSVIEW function) and
application data.
Caution
• Some time is required to erase the data.
• Do not unplug the power cord while data is being
erased.
• This operation does not work when a disc is loaded.
1 Select and set Data Management.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Select and set the erase menu.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
• Individual/Shared Data Erase
Use this procedure to select and erase data
downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used
with the BONUSVIEW function (page 8).
Select Next Screen, then press ENTER. The list
screen appears.
When a disc name is selected, the data downloaded
with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the
BONUSVIEW is erased.
When Shared Data is selected, all the data
downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and not
associated to discs is erased.
Use ¶/¶ to select the data to be erased, then press
ENTER.
• Application Data Erase
Use this procedure to erase BD-ROM application data
(high scores of games, bookmarks data, etc.).
Select Start, then press ENTER.
• Storage Format
Use this procedure to format the storage in which the
data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data
used with the BONUSVIEW function is stored
(page 8).
When this is done, all the data on the external
storage device is erased.
Select Start, then press ENTER.
3 Select Yes, then press ENTER.
Use +/~ to select, then press ENTER.
Number
Audio Language
Initial Setup
BD PLAYER
Language
Video Out
Audio Out
HDMI
Network
Language
Playback
Data Management
Setup Navigator
English
0 5 1 4
Individual/Shared Data Erase
BD PLAYER
15 items
Shared Data
Disc Name 1
Disc Name 2
Disc Name 3
Disc Name 4
Disc Name 5
Disc Name 6
Disc Name 7
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 42 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
43
En
06
+ Registering or Changing the
password
Use this procedure to register or change the code
number required for the Parental Lock settings.
1 Select and set Parental Lock ¬ Set Password ¬
Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Input the password.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
3 Re-input the password.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
• To change the password, input the previously
registered password, then input the new password.
Note
• We recommend making a note of the password.
• If you forget the password, reset the player to the
factory default setting, then register the password
again (page 44).
+ Changing the Parental Lock level for
viewing DVDs
Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence, for
example, have Parental Lock levels (check the indications
on the disc’s jacket or elsewhere). To restrict viewing
these discs, set the player’s level to the level lower than
the discs.
1 Select and set Parental Lock ¬ DVD-Video
Parental Lock ¬ Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Input the password.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
3 Change the level.
Use +/~ to change, then press ENTER to set.
Note
• The level can be set to Off or between Level1 and
Level8. When set to Off, viewing is not restricted.
+ Changing the Age Restriction for
viewing BD-ROMs
For BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence, for example,
viewing can be restricted by setting an age restriction for
the BD-ROMs.
1 Select and set Parental Lock ¬ BDMV Parental
Lock ¬ Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Input the password.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
3 Change the age.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
Note
• When Age Restriction is set to 255, viewing is not
restricted.
+ Changing the Country/Area code
1 Select and set Parental Lock ¬ Country Code ¬
Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Input the password.
Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or ¶/¶ to input the
number, then press ENTER to set.
Use +/~ to move the cursor.
3 Change the country/area code.
Use +/~ to change, then press ENTER to set.
• The the country/area code can also be changed using
the number buttons. Use ¶/¶ to move the cursor to
Number, use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the
number, then press ENTER. Refer to Language Code
Table and Country/Area Code Table on page 47.
+ Setting the output terminals
Set the terminals from which the player’s video and audio
signals are to be output.
1 Select and set Options ¬ Output Terminal ¬
Next Screen.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
2 Select and set the video and audio output
terminals.
Select the actually connected video and audio output
terminals.
Use ¶/¶/+/~ to select, then press ENTER.
For details on the settings, refer to step 4 on page 18.
When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected for
Video, no sound is output from the HDMI OUT terminal
(a warning message is displayed).
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 43 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
44
En
Software updating
The software of the player can be updated by connecting
it to the Internet using a LAN cable.
Before updating the software, make sure that you have
connected the player to the network and made the
necessary settings (pages 17 and 41).
Caution
• Do not unplug the power cord during software
updating. Otherwise, the updating will be aborted and
malfunction may occur with the player.
• There are two processes for software updating,
downloading and updating. Both processes may take
a certain period of time.
• Depending on the Internet connection conditions,
downloading may take a long time.
• Other operations are defeated during software
updating. Furthermore updating process cannot be
canceled.
• When the front panel display is off, turn it on with FL
DIMMER. When updating the player’s software with
the front panel display off, do not unplug the power
cord until the FL OFF indicator turns off.
Note
• Steps 1 to 4 are the operations performed by the user
(they are intended to download the software from the
Internet).
• Steps 5 to 7 are the operations performed
(automatically) by the player (they are intended to
update the software).
1 When playback is stopped, display the Home
Menu screen.
Press HOME MENU.
2 Select and set Initial Setup.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
3 Select and set Options ¬ Software Update ¬
Start.
Use ¶/¶ to select, then press ENTER.
• If the player is already running the latest software, the
message “The player’s software is up to date and does
not need updating.” is displayed.
4 Select and set Yes.
Use +/~ to select Yes, then press ENTER.
• The help menu is displayed if the player cannot
connect to the Internet. Check the connections and
settings (pages 17 and 41).
5 Downloading of the software start.
The software download status is displayed on the screen.
• Depending on the Internet connection conditions,
software downloading may take a certain period of
time.
6 Updating starts.
The front panel display shows messages such as
“DATA CHECK”, “WRT SYS1”, “WRT DRV” and “WRT
FLC”.
• Software updating may take a certain period of time.
7 Updating completes.
The front panel display shows “DOWNLOAD OK” and
the player turns off automatically.
Restoring all the settings to
the factory default settings
1 Check that the player’s power is turned on.
2 When a disc is playing, press N to stop playback.
Eject the disc from the player.
3 While pressing N, press C STANDBY/ON.
Operate using the buttons on the player’s front panel.
Note
• After restoring all the settings to the factory default
settings, use Setup Navigator to reset the player
(page 18).
• When all the settings are restored to the factory
defaults, all the data for the secondary video (Picture-
in-Picture), secondary audio, bookmarks, etc., is
erased.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 44 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
45
En
06
About the audio output settings
The audio signals that are output differ according to the audio format recorded on the disc and the player’s settings.
Check on the table below.
Caution
• When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal, no audio signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal
or DIGITAL OUT terminal (pages 18 and 43).
• When HDMI or DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal, linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output
from all terminals other than the ones selected at Output Terminal (pages 18 and 43).
• The output from all terminals other than the ones selected for Audio does not sound as intended by the content
provider.
Audio format
AUDIO OUT
terminals
DIGITAL OUT terminal HDMI OUT terminal
Converted to
linear PCM audio
1
1. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital ¬ PCM, DTS Out is set to DTS ¬ PCM, or AAC Out is set to AAC ¬ PCM (page 37).
Not converted to
linear PCM audio
2
2. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1/Dolby Digital 2, DTS Out is set to DTS 1/DTS 2 or AAC Out is set to AAC (page 37).
PCM
3
3. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM or Auto (page 38).
Auto
3
BD-
ROM
Dolby Digital
Converted to
2-channel audio
Converted to
2-channel audio
Dolby Digital
4
4. When outputting Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream with settings of Dolby Digital 2 at Dolby Digital Out, DTS 2 at DTS Out,
the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed for output.
5.1-channel audio
Dolby Digital
5,6
5. When outputting the bitstream of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
or DTS Digital Surround, the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed for output.
6. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstream, the signals are output in linear PCM (7.1
channels) or Dolby Digital bitstream.
If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream, the signals are output in linear PCM (2 channels).
Dolby Digital
Plus
7.1-channel audio
Dolby Digital
Plus
5,6
Dolby TrueHD
7.1-channel audio
7
7. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels), depending on HDMI
High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 13).
Dolby TrueHD
5,6,8
8. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels) or Dolby Digital
bitstream, depending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 13).
DTS Digital
Surround
DTS Digital
Surround
4
7.1-channel audio
DTS Digital
Surround
5,9
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio
7.1-channel audio
7
DTS-HD High
Resolution
Audio
5,7,9
DTS-HD Master
Audio
DTS-HD Master
Audio
5,9,10
Linear PCM Converted to 2-
channel audio
7.1-channel audio
7
BD-R/
-RE
Dolby Digital
Converted to
2-channel audio
Converted to
2-channel audio
Dolby Digital
5.1-channel audio
Dolby Digital
6
MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AAC
MPEG
2-channel audio
Linear PCM
DVD-
Video
Dolby Digital
Converted to
2-channel audio
Converted to
2-channel audio
Dolby Digital
5.1-channel audio
Dolby Digital
6
DTS Digital
Surround
DTS Digital
Surround
DTS Digital
Surround
9
MPEG
2-channel audio
Linear PCM
DVD-R/
-RW
(VR
format)
Dolby Digital Converted to
2-channel audio
Converted to
2-channel audio
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio
Dolby Digital
6
MPEG
2-channel audio
Linear PCM
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 45 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
06
46
En
Note
• Only compatible with 7.1-channel surround back. 6.1-channel surround back is output in 7.1 channels. In other
cases, output as audio signals of 5.1-channels or less.
• When outputting linear PCM audio signals, if the number of compatible channels of the connected HDMI device
is lower, the signals are output with the number of channels for which the device is compatible.
• The audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal have a sampling frequency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz for audio
CDs).
9. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the signals are output in
linear PCM (2 channels) or DTS Digital Surround bitstream.
If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with DTS Digital Surround bitstream, the signals are output in linear PCM (2 channels).
10. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels) or DTS Digital
Surround, depending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 46 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
47
En
06
Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table
+ Language Code Table
Language name, language code, input code
+ Country/Area Code Table
Country/Area name, Country/Area code, input code
Abkhazian, ab/abk, 0102
Afar, aa/aar, 0101
Afrikaans, af/afr, 0106
Albanian, sq/sqi, 1917
Amharic, am/amh, 0113
Arabic, ar/ara, 0118
Armenian, hy/hye, 0825
Assamese, as/asm, 0119
Aymara, ay/aym, 0125
Azerbaijani, az/aze, 0126
Bashkir, ba/bak, 0201
Basque, eu/eus, 0521
Belarusian, be/bel, 0205
Bengali, bn/ben, 0214
Bihari, bh/bih, 0208
Bislama, bi/bis, 0209
Breton, br/bre, 0218
Bulgarian, bg/bul, 0207
Burmese, my/mya, 1325
Catalan, ca/cat, 0301
Central Khmer, km/khm, 1113
Chinese, zh/zho, 2608
Corsican, co/cos, 0315
Croatian, hr/hrv, 0818
Czech, cs/ces, 0319
Danish, da/dan, 0401
Dutch, nl/nld, 1412
Dzongkha, dz/dzo, 0426
English, en/eng, 0514
Esperanto, eo/epo, 0515
Estonian, et/est, 0520
Finnish, fi/fin, 0609
Fijian, fj/fij, 0610
Faroese, fo/fao, 0615
French, fr/fra, 0618
Galician, gl/glg, 0712
Georgian, ka/kat, 1101
German, de/deu, 0405
Greek, el/ell, 0512
Guarani, gn/grn, 0714
Gujarati, gu/guj, 0721
Hausa, ha/hau, 0801
Hebrew, iw/heb, 0923
Hindi, hi/hin, 0809
Hungarian, hu/hun, 0821
Icelandic, is/isl, 0919
Indonesian, in/ind, 0914
Interlingua, ia/ina, 0901
Interlingue, ie/ile, 0905
Inupiaq, ik/ipk, 0911
Irish, ga/gle, 0701
Italian, it/ita, 0920
Japanese, ja/jpn, 1001
Javanese, jw/jav, 1023
Kalaallisut, kl/kal, 1112
Kannada, kn/kan, 1114
Kashmiri, ks/kas, 1119
Kazakh, kk/kaz, 1111
Kinyarwanda, rw/kin, 1823
Kirghiz, ky/kir, 1125
Korean, ko/kor, 1115
Kurdish, ku/kur, 1121
Lao, lo/lao, 1215
Latin, la/lat, 1201
Latvian, lv/lav, 1222
Lingala, ln/lin, 1214
Lithuanian, lt/lit, 1220
Macedonian, mk/mkd, 1311
Malagasy, mg/mlg, 1307
Malay, ms/msa, 1319
Malayalam, ml/mal, 1312
Maltese, mt/mlt, 1320
Maori, mi/mri, 1309
Marathi, mr/mar, 1318
Mongolian, mn/mon, 1314
Moldavian, mo/mol, 1315
Nauru, na/nau, 1401
Nepali, ne/nep, 1405
Norwegian, no/nor, 1415
Occitan, oc/oci, 1503
Oriya, or/ori, 1518
Oromo, om/orm, 1513
Panjabi, pa/pan, 1601
Persian, fa/fas, 0601
Polish, pl/pol, 1612
Portuguese, pt/por, 1620
Pushto, ps/pus, 1619
Quechua, qu/que, 1721
Romanian, ro/ron, 1815
Romansch, rm/roh, 1813
Rundi, rn/run, 1814
Russian, ru/rus, 1821
Samoan, sm/smo, 1913
Sango, sg/sag, 1907
Sanskrit, sa/san, 1901
Scottish Gaelic, gd/gla, 0704
Serbian, sr/srp, 1918
Serbo-Croatian, sh/---, 1908
Shona, sn/sna, 1914
Sindhi, sd/snd, 1904
Sinhalese, si/sin, 1909
Slovak, sk/slk, 1911
Slovenian, sl/slv, 1912
Somali, so/som, 1915
Sotho, Southern, st/sot, 1920
Spanish, es/spa, 0519
Sundanese, su/sun, 1921
Swahili, sw/swa, 1923
Swati, ss/ssw, 1919
Swedish, sv/swe, 1922
Tagalog, tl/tgl, 2012
Tajik, tg/tgk, 2007
Tamil, ta/tam, 2001
Tatar, tt/tat, 2020
Telugu, te/tel, 2005
Thai, th/tha, 2008
Tibetan, bo/bod, 0215
Tigrinya, ti/tir, 2009
Tonga (Tonga Islands), to/ton, 2015
Tsonga, ts/tso, 2019
Tswana, tn/tsn, 2014
Turkmen, tk/tuk, 2011
Turkish, tr/tur, 2018
Twi, tw/twi, 2023
Ukrainian, uk/ukr, 2111
Urdu, ur/urd, 2118
Uzbek, uz/uzb, 2126
Vietnamese, vi/vie, 2209
Volapük, vo/vol, 2215
Welsh, cy/cym, 0325
Western Frisian, fy/fry, 0625
Wolof, wo/wol, 2315
Xhosa, xh/xho, 2408
Yiddish, ji/yid, 1009
Yoruba, yo/yor, 2515
Zulu, zu/zul, 2621
Anguilla, ai, 0109
Antigua and Barbuda, ag, 0107
Argentina, ar, 0118
Armenia, am, 0113
Australia, au, 0121
Austria, at, 0120
Azerbaijan, az, 0126
Bahamas, bs, 0219
Barbados, bb, 0202
Belarus, by, 0225
Belgium, be, 0205
Belize, bz, 0226
Bermuda, bm, 0213
Brazil, br, 0218
Bulgaria, bg, 0207
Canada, ca, 0301
Cayman Islands, ky, 1125
Chile, cl, 0312
China, cn, 0314
Colombia, co, 0315
Croatia, hr, 0818
Cyprus, cy, 0325
Czech Republic, cz, 0326
Denmark, dk, 0411
Dominica, dm, 0413
Dominican Republic, do, 0415
Estonia, ee, 0505
Finland, fi, 0609
France, fr, 0618
Georgia, ge, 0705
Germany, de, 0405
Greece, gr, 0718
Greenland, gl, 0712
Grenada, gd, 0704
Guyana, gy, 0725
Haiti, ht, 0820
Hong Kong, hk, 0811
Hungary, hu, 0821
Iceland, is, 0919
India, in, 0914
Indonesia, id, 0904
Ireland, ie, 0905
Israel, il, 0912
Italy, it, 0920
Jamaica, jm, 1013
Japan, jp, 1016
Kazakhstan, kz, 1126
Korea, Republic of, kr, 1118
Kyrgyzstan, kg, 1107
Latvia, lv, 1222
Liechtenstein, li, 1209
Lithuania, lt, 1220
Luxembourg, lu, 1221
Macedonia, the Former Yugoslav
Republic of, mk, 1311
Malaysia, my, 1325
Malta, mt, 1320
Mexico, mx, 1324
Moldova, Republic of, md, 1304
Monaco, mc, 1303
Montserrat, ms, 1319
Netherlands, nl, 1412
New Zealand, nz, 1426
Norway, no, 1415
Pakistan, pk, 1611
Peru, pe, 1605
Philippines, ph, 1608
Poland, pl, 1612
Portugal, pt, 1620
Puerto Rico, pr, 1618
Romania, ro, 1815
Russian Federation, ru, 1821
Saint Kitts and Nevis, kn, 1114
Saint Lucia, lc, 1203
Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines, vc, 2203
San Marino, sm, 1913
Singapore, sg, 1907
Slovakia, sk, 1911
Slovenia, si, 1909
Spain, es, 0519
Suriname, sr, 1918
Sweden, se, 1905
Switzerland, ch, 0308
Taiwan, Province of China, tw, 2023
Tajikistan, tj, 2010
Thailand, th, 2008
Trinidad and Tobago, tt, 2020
Tunisia, tn, 2014
Turkey, tr, 2018
Turkmenistan, tm, 2013
Turks and Caicos Islands, tc, 2003
Ukraine, ua, 2101
United Kingdom, gb, 0702
United States, us, 2119
Uruguay, uy, 2125
Uzbekistan, uz, 2126
Venezuela, ve, 2205
Virgin Islands, British, vg, 2207
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 47 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
48
En
Chapter 7
Additional information
Licenses
The licenses for the software used on
this player are shown below.
+libxml2
The MIT License
Copyright © <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall
be included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+OpenSSL
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the
conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay
license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both
licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any
license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-
core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of
this software must display the following
acknowledgment: “This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project”
must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called
“OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names
without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the
following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).This product includes
software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric
Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use
as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this
distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not
just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright
notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is
used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as
the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of
this software must display the following
acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines
from the library being used are not cryptographic related
:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative
thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you
must include an acknowledgement: “This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically
available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put
under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
+zlib
This software is based in part on zlib see http://www.zlib.net
for information.
+FreeType2
The FreeType Project LICENSE
2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive
packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions
which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test
programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage
inclusion and use of free software in commercial and
freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points
are that:
• We don’t promise that this software works. However, we
will be interested in any kind of bug reports.(‘as is’
distribution)
• You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts
or full form, without having to pay us.(‘royalty-free’
usage)
• You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you
use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must
acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that
you have used the FreeType code.(‘credits’)
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in commercial
products. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType
Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType
Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license.
We thus encourage you to use the following text:
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The
FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType
version you actually use.
Legal Terms
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms ‘package’, ‘FreeType
Project’, and ‘FreeType archive’ refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the ‘FreeType
Project’, be they named as alpha, beta or final release.
‘You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project,
where ‘using’ is a generic term including compiling the
project’s source code as well as linking it to form a
‘program’ or ‘executable’. This program is referred to as
‘a program using the FreeType engine’.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original
FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file
is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify
this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY
OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR
THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual
and irrevocable right and license to use, execute,
perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works
of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in
both source and object code forms) and derivative works
thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to
exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject
to the following conditions:
• Redistribution of source code must retain this license
file (‘FTL.TXT’) unaltered; any additions, deletions or
changes to the original files must be clearly indicated
in accompanying documentation. The copyright
notices of the unaltered, original files must be
preserved in all copies of source files.
• Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that states that the software is based in part
of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution
documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL
to the FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn’t mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or
based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified
files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us.
However, no fee need be paid to us.
3. Advertising
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you
shall use the name of the other for commercial,
advertising, or promotional purposes without specific
prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more
of the following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials: ‘FreeType
Project’, ‘FreeType Engine’, ‘FreeType library’, or
‘FreeType Distribution’.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required
to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 48 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
49
En
07
copyrighted material, only this license, or another one
contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use,
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using,
distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you
indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of
this license.
4. Contacts
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
• freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType,
as well as future and wanted additions to the library
and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in
this list if you haven’t found anything to help you in the
documentation.
• freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design
issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
+libpng
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.26, April
2, 2008, are Copyright © 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-
Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following
individual added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October
3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-
Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is
no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of
your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided
with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March
20, 2000, are Copyright © 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-
Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997,
are Copyright © 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed
according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-
0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996,
are Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
“Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The
Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all
warranties, expressed or implied, including, without
limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness
for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42,
Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may
result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any
purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and
must not be misrepresented as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from
any source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically
permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source
code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in
commercial products. If you use this source code in a
product, acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient
use in “about” boxes and the like:
printf(“%s”,png_get_copyright(NULL));Also, the PNG logo
(in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files
“pngbar.png” and “pngbar.jpg (88x31) and “pngnow.png”
(98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified
Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source
Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
2-Apr-08
+libjpg
The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the
Independent JPEG Group’s free JPEG software. You are
welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any
purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES,
below.
Serious users of this software (particularly those
incorporating it into larger programs) should contact IJG at
jpeg-info@uunet.uu.net to be added to our electronic
mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of updates
and have a chance to participate in technical discussions,
etc.
This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim
Boucher, Lee Crocker, Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George
Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge’ Weijers, and
other members of the Independent JPEG Group.
IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards
committee.
DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP
This file contains the following sections:
OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and
the IJG software.
LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms
of distribution.
REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of
this software.
RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get.
FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.
TO DO Plans for future IJG releases.
Other documentation files in the distribution are:
User documentation:
install.doc How to configure and install the IJG
software.
usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg,
jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom.
*.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as
usage.doc).
wizard.doc Advanced usage instructions for JPEG
wizards only.
change.log Version-to-version change highlights.
Programmer and internal documentation:
libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own
programs.
example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library.
structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library’s internal
structure.
filelist.doc Road map of IJG files.
coderules.doc Coding style rules --- please read if you
contribute code.
Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc.
Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ
(Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE
LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ
article.
If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we
suggest reading one or more of the REFERENCES, then
looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order
listed) before diving into the code.
OVERVIEW
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image compression and decompression. JPEG
(pronounced “jay-peg”) is a standardized compression
method for full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is
intended for compressing real-world scenes; line drawings,
cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong
suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not
exactly identical to the input image. Hence you must not
use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However,
on typical photographic images, very good compression
levels can be obtained with no visible change, and
remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can
tolerate a low-quality image. For more details, see the
references, or just experiment with various compression
settings.
This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-
sequential, and progressive compression processes.
Provision is made for supporting all variants of these
processes, although some uncommon parameter settings
aren’t implemented yet. For legal reasons, we are not
distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of
JPEG; see LEGAL ISSUES. We have made no provision for
supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined
in the standard.
We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing
JPEG image files, plus two sample applications “cjpeg” and
“djpeg”, which use the library to perform conversion
between JPEG and some other popular image file formats.
The library is intended to be reused in other applications.
In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we
have included considerable functionality beyond the bare
JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color
quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG
decoding, but they are essential for output to colormapped
file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions
can be compiled out of the library if not required for a
particular application. We have also included jpegtran, a
utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG
processes, and “rdjpgcom” and “wrjpgcom”, two simple
applications for inserting and extracting textual comments
in JFIF files.
The emphasis in designing this software has been on
achieving portability and flexibility, while also making it fast
enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not
intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the
REFERENCES section for introductory material.) Rather, it
is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength
code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every
aspect of the software, but we strive for it.
We welcome the use of this software as a component of
commercial products. No royalty is required, but we do ask
for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as
described under LEGAL ISSUES.
LEGAL ISSUES
In plain English:
1. We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you
find any bugs, please let us know!)
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You
don’t have to pay us.
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you
use it in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere
in your documentation that you’ve used the IJG code.
In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either
express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality,
accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular
purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its
user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All
Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any
purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1)If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this README file must be included,
with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered;
and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original
files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
(2)If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying documentation must state that “this
software is based in part on the work of the Independent
JPEG Group”.
(3)Permission for use of this software is granted only if the
user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable
consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for
damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or
based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If
you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s
name or company name in advertising or publicity relating
to this software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as “the Independent JPEG Group’s
software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of commercial products, provided
that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the
product vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of
L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder,
Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT
covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead
by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software
Foundation; principally, that you must include source code
if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any
program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit
you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced
with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free Software
Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds for its
supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig,
ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright
by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 49 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
50
En
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG
spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and
Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be
used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this
reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed
from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding
provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman
mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will
support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent
restrictions on the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and
write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW
patent, GIF reading support has been removed altogether,
and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce
uncompressed GIFs. This technique does not use the LZW
algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but
are readable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that
“The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright
property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a
Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated.”
REFERENCES
We highly recommend reading one or more of these
references before trying to understand the innards of the
JPEG software.
The best short technical introduction to the JPEG
compression algorithm is
Wallace, Gregory K. “The JPEG Still Picture Compression
Standard”,
Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4),
pp. 30-44.
(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion
picture compression, applications of JPEG, and related
topics.) If you don’t have the CACM issue handy, a
PostScript file containing a revised version of Wallace’s
article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/
wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that
appeared in IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the
sample images that appeared in CACM, but it includes
corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace
article is copyright ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used
for commercial purposes.
A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to
JPEG can be found in The Data Compression Book by Mark
Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T Books (New
York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides
good explanations and example C code for a multitude of
compression methods including JPEG. It is an excellent
source if you are comfortable reading C code but don’t
know much about data compression in general. The book’s
JPEG sample code is far from industrial-strength, but when
you are ready to look at a full implementation, you’ve got
one here...
The best full description of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still
Image Data Compression Standard” by William B.
Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price
US$59.95, 638 pp. The book includes the complete text of
the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 10918-
2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in
existence, and we highly recommend it.
The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you
must order a paper copy through ISO or ITU. (Unless you
feel a need to own a certified official copy, we recommend
buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it’s
much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful
explanatory material.) In the USA, copies of the standard
may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900, or from
Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI
doesn’t take credit card orders, but Global does.) It’s not
cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part 1 and $47
for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is
divided into two parts, Part 1 being the actual specification,
while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods. Part 1 is
titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone
Still Images, Part 1: Requirements and guidelines” and has
document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81. Part 2 is
titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone
Still Images, Part 2: Compliance testing” and has
document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83.
Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined
in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS
10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any
Part 3 extensions.
The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an
interchangeable file format. For the omitted details we
follow the “JFIF” conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the
JFIF spec is available from:
Literature Department
C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.
1778 McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314
A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain
text version at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it
is missing the figures.
The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP
from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG
incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of 3-June-
92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not
recommend use of the TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression
tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design proposed
by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of
this Note can be obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://
ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next
revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design
with the Note’s design. Although IJG’s own code does not
support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our library to
implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from
ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS
The “official” archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net
(Internet address 192.48.96.9). The most recent released
version can always be found there in directory graphics/
jpeg. This particular version will be archived as ftp://
ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don’t
have direct Internet access, UUNET’s archives are also
available via UUCP; contact help@uunet.uu.net for
information on retrieving files that way.
Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET
files. However, only ftp.uu.net is guaranteed to have the
latest official version.
You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible “zip”
archive format from the SimTel archives (ftp://
ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on
CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO
CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these
versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.
The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a
useful source of general information about JPEG. It is
updated constantly and therefore is not included in this
distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet
newsgroups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and
other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http:/
/www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers
archive sites, including the official news.answers archive at
rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/
jpeg-faq/. If you don’t have Web or FTP access, send e-mail
to mail-server@rtfm.mit.edu with body
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2
RELATED SOFTWARE
Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now
support JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so.)
The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more
popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to
obtain them on Internet.
If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef
Poskanzer’s free PBMPLUS software, which provides many
useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular,
it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of
other formats, thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more
useful. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM
group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://
wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphics/graphics/packages/
NetPBM/. Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly
as portable as the IJG software is; you are likely to have
difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.
A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG
group at Stanford, is available from ftp://
havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed
for research and experimentation rather than production
use; it is slower, harder to use, and less portable than the
IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG
code supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the
other hand, it doesn’t do progressive JPEG.)
FILE FORMAT WARS
Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible
with our library. The root of the problem is that the ISO
JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format.
Some vendors “filled in the blanks” on their own, creating
proprietary formats that no one else could read. (For
example, none of the early commercial JPEG
implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange
compressed files.)
The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see
REFERENCES). This format has been agreed to by a
number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has
become the de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or “low
end” representation. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG
(TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for
“high end” applications that need to record a lot of
additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and
not yet widely supported, unfortunately.
The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format
called SPIFF. SPIFF is interoperable with JFIF, in the sense
that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most
common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical
advantages over JFIF, but its major claim to fame is simply
that it is an official standard rather than an informal one. At
this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or
whether JFIF will remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends
to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have
not decided whether it should become our default output
format or not. (In any case, our decoder will remain capable
of reading JFIF indefinitely.)
Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG
compression also exist. We have little or no sympathy for
the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original
reasons for developing this free software was to help force
convergence on common, open format standards for JPEG
files. Don’t use a proprietary file format!
TO DO
The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of
visual quality. The current method for scaling the
quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q
values. We also intend to investigate block boundary
smoothing, “poor man’s variable quantization”, and other
means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance
without sacrificing compatibility.
In future versions, we are considering supporting some of
the upcoming JPEG Part 3 extensions --- principally,
variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.
As always, speeding things up is of great interest.
Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to jpeg-
info@uunet.uu.net.
+libupnp
Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT
PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE
VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (”AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. No LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM.
+GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software - to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit
to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software
is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 50 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
51
En
07
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get
it if you want it, that you can change the software or use
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by
someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must
be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this General Public
License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such
program or work, and a “work based on the Program”
means either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as
“you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered
only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running
the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the
Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice
and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices
that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a
copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as
a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice
that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user
how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally
print such an announcement, your work based on the
Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which
is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the Program with the Program (or with a work based
on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work
based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided
that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the executable. However,
as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
the same place counts as distribution of the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License
to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on
it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work
based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights
granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of
patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could
satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
Program under this License may add an explicit
geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the General Public License from time
to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the Program specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be
guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the
sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve
this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 51 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
52
En
should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of
what it does.>
Copyright © <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General
Public License along with this program; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of
author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you
are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions;
type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could
even be mouse-clicks or menu items - whatever suits your
program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright
disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at
compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is
a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to
permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If
this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this License.
+GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also
counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License,
version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software - to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser
General Public License, applies to some specially
designated software packages - typically libraries - of the
Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to
use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General
Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular
case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
it if you want it; that you can change the software and use
pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed
that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to
certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code
with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear
that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the
original version, so that the original author’s reputation will
not be affected by problems that might be introduced by
others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a
company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free
program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained
for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by
the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the
GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-
free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the
original library. The ordinary General Public License
therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing
non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special
need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve
this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same
job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is
little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-
free programs enables a greater number of people to use a
large body of free software. For example, permission to use
the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many
more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as
well as its variant, the GNU Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the
user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a
modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the
difference between a “work based on the library” and a
“work that uses the library”. The former contains code
derived from the library, whereas the latter must be
combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or
other program which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General
Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee
is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/
or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or
work which has been distributed under these terms. A
“work based on the Library” means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the Library or a portion of it, either
verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term
“modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the
work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using the
Library is not restricted, and output from such a program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool
for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the
Library does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
all the notices that refer to this License and to the
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this
License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work
under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you
also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at
no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you
must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever
part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example,
a function in a library to compute square roots has a
purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that
any application-supplied function or table used by this
function must be optional: if the application does not
supply it, the square root function must still compute
square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which
is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on
the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the
notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the
ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not
make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General
Public License applies to all subsequent copies and
derivative works made from that copy. This option is
useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code, which
must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 52 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
53
En
07
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that
uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside
the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the Library),
rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a
header file that is part of the Library, the object code for
the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is
especially significant if the work can be linked without
the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold
for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables
containing this object code plus portions of the Library
will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you
may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work
also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also
combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the
Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your
choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a
copy of this License. If the work during execution displays
copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice
for the Library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you
must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work
that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then
relink to produce a modified executable containing the
modified Library. (It is understood that the user who
changes the contents of definitions files in the Library
will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present
on the user’s computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and (2) will
operate properly with a modified version of the library,
if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work
was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access
to copy the above specified materials from the same
place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that
uses the Library” must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do
not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on
the Library side-by-side in a single library together with
other library facilities not covered by this License, and
distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library
and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities. This must be distributed under
the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the
fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you
have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying
or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to
do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10.Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based
on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link
with or modify the Library subject to these terms and
conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties with this License.
11.If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of
patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could
satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this
section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose
that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12.If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
Library under this License may add an explicit
geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
13.The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License
from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the Library specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever
published by the Free Software Foundation.
14.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the
free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these
terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary
General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and
each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a
pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of
what it does.>
Copyright © <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General
Public License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright
disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
+[Notice on GNU General Public
License]
This product include the software licensed for use under
the terms of a GNU General Public License. A copy of the
corresponding source code can be obtained by being
charged the fee for distribution.
To obtain a copy, contact your local Pioneer Customer
Support Center.
See the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org) for details of the
GNU General Public License.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 53 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
54
En
Cautions on use
Moving the player
If you need to move this unit, first remove the disc if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press
C STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby,
checking that the POWER OFF indication on the front
panel display goes off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly,
disconnect the power cord.
Never lift or move the unit during playback — discs rotate
at a high speed and may be damaged.
Place of installation
Select a stable place near the TV and AV system to which
the unit is connected.
Do not place the player on top of a TV or color monitor.
Keep it away from cassette decks or other components
easily affected by magnetism.
Avoid the following types of places:
• Places exposed to direct sunlight
• Humid or poorly ventilated places
• Extremely hot or cold places
• Places subject to vibration
• Dusty places
• Places exposed to soot, steam or heat (in kitchens,
etc.)
+ Do not place objects on top
Do not place objects on top of the player.
+ Do not obstruct the ventilation
holes
Do not use the player on a shaggy rug, bed, or sofa, and
do not cover the player with a cloth, etc. Doing so will
prevent heat dissipation and could lead to damage.
+ Keep away from heat
Do not place the player on top of an amplifier or other
device generating heat. When installing in a rack, to avoid
the heat generated by the amplifier and other devices,
place it on a shelf below the amplifier whenever possible.
Turn the power off when not
using the player
Depending on the conditions of the TV broadcast signals,
striped patterns may appear on the screen when the TV is
turned on while the player’s power is turned on. This is not
a malfunction with the player or TV. If this happens, turn
the player’s power off. In the same way, noise may be
heard in the sound of a radio.
Condensation
If the player is moved suddenly from a cold place into a
warm room (in winter, for example) or if the temperature
in the room in which the player is installed rises suddenly
due to a heater, etc., water droplets (condensation) may
form inside (on operating parts and the lens). When
condensation is present, the player will not operate
properly and playback is not possible. Let the player stand
at room temperature for 1 or 2 hours with the power
turned on (the time depends on the extent of
condensation). The water droplets will dissipate and
playback will become possible.
Condensation can also occur in the summer if the player
is exposed to the direct wind from an air-conditioner. If
this happens, move the player to a different place.
Cleaning the player
Normally, wipe the player with a soft cloth. For tough dirt,
apply some neutral detergent diluted in 5 to 6 parts water
to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then
wipe again with a dry cloth.
Note that getting alcohol, thinner, benzene or insecticide
on the player could cause the print and coating to peel off.
Also, avoid leaving rubber or vinyl products in contact
with the player for long periods of time, as this could
damage the cabinet.
When using chemical-impregnated wipes, etc., read the
wipe’s cautions carefully.
Unplug the power cord from the power outlet when
cleaning the player.
Caution for when the unit is
installed in a rack with a glass
door
Do not press the ± OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control
to open the disc tray while the glass door is closed. The
door will hamper the movement of the disc tray, and the
unit could be damaged.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The player’s lens should not become dirty in normal use,
but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust
or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service
center. Although lens cleaners for players are
commercially available, we advise against using them
since some may damage the lens.
Handling discs
Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.
Do not scratch the disc’s signal surface or let it get dirty.
Do not load more than one disc into the player at a time.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 54 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
55
En
07
Do not glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
+ Storing discs
Always store discs in their cases, and place the cases
vertically, avoiding places exposed to high temperature or
humidity, direct sunlight or extremely low temperatures.
Be sure to read the cautions included with the disc.
+ Cleaning discs
It may not be possible to play the disc if there are
fingerprints or dust on it. In this case, using a cleaning
cloth, etc., to wipe the disc gently from the center toward
the outer edge. Do not use a dirty cleaning cloth.
Do not use benzene, thinner or other volatile chemicals.
Also do not use record spray or antistatic agents.
For tough dirt, apply some water to a soft cloth, wring out
thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then wipe off the moisture
with a dry cloth.
+ Specially shaped discs
Specially shaped discs (heart-shaped, hexagonal, etc.)
cannot be used on this player. Never use such discs, as
they will damage the player.
+ Condensation on discs
If the disc is moved suddenly from a cold place into a
warm room (in winter, for example), water droplets
(condensation) may form on the disc surface. Discs will
not play properly if there is condensation on them.
Carefully wipe off the water droplets from the disc surface
before using the disc.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this
component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points
below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
Playback
Problem Check Remedy
• Disc does not play.
• Disc tray opens
automatically.
Is the disc one that is
playable on this player?
Check whether the disc is one that can be played on this player
(page 7).
Is the file one that is playable
on this player?
• Check whether the file is one that can be played on this player
(page 9).
• Check whether or not the file is damaged.
Is the disc scratched? It may not be possible to play scratched discs.
Is the disc dirty? Clean the disc (above).
Is there a piece of paper or
sticker attached to the disc?
The disc may be warped and unplayable.
Is the disc properly set in the
disc tray?
• Set the disc with the printed side facing up.
• Set the disc properly in the depression in the disc tray.
Is the region number correct? See About region numbers on page 9 for the region numbers of discs
that can be played on this player.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 55 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
56
En
No picture is displayed or the
picture is not displayed
properly.
Is the video cable properly
connected?
• Connect the cable properly according to the connected devices
(page 13).
• Insert the cable firmly and all the way in.
Is the video cable damaged? If the cable is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Is the input setting on the
connected TV or AV receiver
or amplifier right?
Read the operating instructions of the connected components and
switch to the proper input.
Are you viewing the picture
from the video output
terminal selected with VIDEO
SELECT?
Press VIDEO SELECT to switch the video output terminal to be viewed
(page 21).
Is the output video resolution
properly set?
Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch to a resolution at which the video
and audio signals are output (page 21).
• Is the player connected
with an HDMI cable other
than a High Speed HDMI™
cable (with a Standard
HDMI™ cable)?
• Are you using an HDMI
cable with built-in equalizer?
1080p or Deep Color video signals may not be output properly,
depending on the HDMI cable being used or the player’s settings.
Press N while pressing > on the player’s front panel to restore the
video outputs to the factory default settings. After this, if you wish to
output the video signals with 1080p or Deep Color, connect the TV
using a High Speed HDMI™ cable without built-in equalizer, then reset
the player using the Setup Navigator (page 18).
Does the connected TV
support the frame rate of the
video signal being output by
the player?
If the picture is not displayed when playing a disc with a frame rate that
is not supported, the picture will not be displayed even when playback
is stopped. In this case, use the procedure below to switch the frame
rate of the video signals output from the player.
Eject the disc and close the disc tray. Then, press ± OPEN/CLOSE
while pressing > on the player’s front panel to switch to a frame rate
supported by the connected TV.
Is NTSC on PAL TV properly
set?
When viewing the video signals output from the player’s S-Video or
Video terminal, set NTSC on PAL TV properly (page 37).
Is a DVI device connected? The picture may not be displayed properly if a DVI device is connected.
Is HDMI Color Space
properly set?
Change the HDMI Color Space setting (page 38).
Picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control
buttons stop working.
• Press N STOP to stop playback, then restart playback.
• If the playback cannot be stopped, press C STANDBY/ON on the
player’s front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold C STANDBY/ON
on the player’s front panel for over 5 seconds. The power will turn off.
Motion is unnatural or
picture is not clear.
Change the Pure Cinema setting (page 34).
No picture is displayed or
picture is not output in high
definition when playing BDs.
With some discs, it may not be possible to output the video signals from
the VIDEO output terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output
terminals. In this case, connect using an HDMI cable (page 13).
• Picture is disturbed during
playback.
• Picture is dark.
• This player supports Macrovision analog copy protection technology.
With some TVs (such as with built-in video deck), the picture will not be
displayed properly when the copy protected DVD title is played. This is
not a malfunction.
• If the player and TV are connected via a DVD recorder/video deck,
etc., the picture will not be displayed properly due to analog copy
protection. Connect the player and TV directly.
Problem Check Remedy
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 56 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
57
En
07
• Picture is stretched.
• Picture is cropped.
• Aspect ratio cannot be
switched.
Is the TV’s aspect ratio
properly set?
Read the TV’s operating instructions and set the TV’s aspect ratio
properly.
Is TV Aspect Ratio properly
set?
Set TV Aspect Ratio properly (page 37).
Is 4:3 Video Out properly
set?
Set 4:3 Video Out properly (page 37).
Is DVD 16:9 Video Out
properly set?
Set DVD 16:9 Video Out properly (page 37).
When video signals with a resolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p,
1080/24p, 1080/60i, 1080/60p or 720/60p are being output from the
HDMI OUT terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals,
they may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Ratio
is set to 4:3 (Standard) (page 37).
Picture is interrupted. The picture may be interrupted when the resolution of the recorded
video signal switches. Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION to select a setting
other than Auto or Source Direct (page 21).
The subtitles cannot be
switched.
The subtitles cannot be switched for discs recorded on a DVD or BD
recorder.
Sound and picture are not
synchronized.
Is Output Terminal properly
set?
Set Output Terminal properly (pages 18 and 43).
Is Lip Sync properly set? Adjust the amount of audio delay with the Lip Sync setting (page 35).
• No sound is output.
• Sound is not output
properly.
Is the disc played back in
slow motion?
Is the disc played back in fast
forward or fast reverse?
No sound is output during slow motion play and forward and reverse
scanning.
Are the audio cables properly
connected?
• Connect the cable properly according to the connected devices
(page 13).
• Insert the cable firmly and all the way in.
Is the audio cable damaged? If the cable is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Are the connected
components (AV receiver or
amplifier, etc.) properly set?
Read the operating instructions of the connected components and
check the volume, input, speaker settings, etc.
Are you trying to listen to the
sound of the HDMI OUT
terminal while watching the
picture from the
COMPONENT VIDEO or
VIDEO output terminals?
Audio signals are not output from the HDMI OUT terminal when video
signals are being output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO
output terminals. When watching the picture of the COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals, connect an optical digital audio
cable or regular audio cables to listen to the sound (page 16). Once
connections are completed, use Setup Navigator to make the player’s
settings (page 18).
Is HDMI Audio Out properly
set?
Set HDMI Audio Out to Auto or PCM. (page 38).
Is Output Terminal properly
set?
When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal, no audio
signals are output from the HDMI OUT or DIGITAL OUT terminal
(page 43).
Is the output video resolution
properly set?
Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch to the resolution at which the
video and audio signals are output (page 21).
Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be output from the HDMI OUT terminal if a DVI
device is connected. Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT terminal or
the AUDIO OUT terminals (page 16).
For some BDs, audio signals are only output from DIGITAL OUT
terminal or the HDMI OUT terminal.
Problem Check Remedy
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 57 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
58
En
Multi-channel sound is not
output.
Is Output Terminal properly
set?
Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from output terminals
other than the one set at Output Terminal under Audio Out. Set
Output Terminal properly (page 43).
Is the audio output of the
connected AV receiver or
amplifier, etc., properly set?
Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or
amplifier and check the audio output settings of AV receiver or
amplifier.
Is multi-channel sound
selected?
Use the menu screen or AUDIO to switch the disc’s sound to multi-
channel.
Noise can be heard when
outputting DTS Digital
Surround signals from the
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
Is the connected AV receiver
or amplifier compatible with
DTS Digital Surround?
If an AV receiver or amplifier that is not compatible with DTS Digital
Surround is connected to the DIGITAL OUT terminal, set DTS Out to
DTS ¬ PCM (page 37).
192 kHz or 96 kHz digital
audio signals cannot be
output from the DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
It is not possible to output 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals from
this player’s DIGITAL OUT terminal. The signals are automatically
converted to 48 kHz or less for output.
Secondary audio or
interactive audio is not
output.
Is HDMI Audio Out properly
set?
When listening to the sound from an HDMI OUT terminal, set HDMI
Audio Out to PCM (page 38).
Are Dolby Digital Out and
DTS Out properly set?
When listening to the sound from an DIGITAL OUT terminal, set Dolby
Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1, DTS Out to DTS 1 (page 37).
Sound is fast or slow. When an HDMI cable is
connected, are audio signals
being output from devices
connected with cables other
than HDMI cables?
When a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS
function is connected directly to the player’s HDMI OUT terminal using
an HDMI cable, the PQLS function is activated when playing discs.
Because of this, the sound output from components other than the
ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast or slow. If this happens, set
PQLS to Off (page 38).
After a disc is inserted,
Loading stays displayed and
playback does not start.
Are there too many files
recorded on the disc?
When a disc on which files are recorded is inserted, depending on the
number of files recorded on the disc, loading may take several dozen
minutes.
N is displayed in file names,
etc.
The characters that cannot be displayed on this player are displayed in
N.
A message indicating low
memory appears while
playing a BD-ROM disc.
• Perform Individual/Shared Data Erase or Storage Format
(page 42).
• Perform Application Data Erase (page 42).
The DVD layer of BD and DVD
hybrid discs cannot be
played.
Is Hybrid Disc Playback
properly set?
Set Hybrid Disc Playback to DVD (page 39).
The CD layer of BD and CD
hybrid discs cannot be
played.
Is Hybrid Disc Playback
properly set?
Set Hybrid Disc Playback to CD (page 39).
The BDMV format on BD-R/
-RE discs cannot be played.
To play the BDMV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV
and BDAV formats, set BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority to BDMV
(page 39).
Problem Check Remedy
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 58 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
59
En
07
KURO LINK
Network
Problem Check Remedy
KURO LINK function does
not work.
Is the HDMI cable properly
connected?
To use the KURO LINK function, connect the Flat Screen TV, and AV
system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) and HD AV Converter to the
HDMI OUT terminal (page 15).
Is the HDMI cable you are
using a High Speed HDMI™
cable?
Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable. The KURO LINK function may not
work properly if HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI™ cable is
used.
Are you connected to the TV
using an HDMI cable to
watch the picture?
If video signals are being output from a terminal other than the HDMI
OUT terminal, the KURO LINK function does not work. Connect to the
TV using an HDMI cable and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the
HDMI OUT terminal (pages 15 and 21).
Is KURO LINK set to On on
the player?
Set KURO LINK to On on the player (page 38).
Does the connected device
support the KURO LINK
function?
• The KURO LINK function will not work with devices of other brands
that do not support the KURO LINK function, even when connected
using an HDMI cable.
• The KURO LINK function will not work if devices that do not support
the KURO LINK function are connected between the KURO LINK-
compatible device and the player.
• See About connections to components of other makes supporting the
KURO LINK function on page 15.
• Even when connected to a Pioneer product compatible with the
KURO LINK function, some of the functions may not work.
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected device.
Is KURO LINK set to On on
the connected device?
Set KURO LINK to On on the connected device. The KURO LINK
function operates when KURO LINK is set to On for all devices
connected to the HDMI OUT terminal.
Once connections and settings of all the devices are finished, be sure
to check that the player’s picture is output to the Flat Screen TV. (Also
check after changing the connected devices and connecting and/or
disconnecting HDMI cables.) If the player’s picture is not being output
to the Flat Screen TV, the KURO LINK function may not work properly.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the connected device.
Are multiple players
connected?
The KURO LINK function may not work if three or more players,
including this player, are connected by HDMI cable.
The input does not switch
automatically on the Flat
Screen TV and AV system (AV
receiver or amplifier, etc.)
when playback is started on
the player or the Home Menu
or Home Media Gallery is
displayed.
Is Display Power On set to
Off on the player?
Set Display Power On to On (page 38).
Problem Check Remedy
• BD-LIVE function
(connection to the Internet)
cannot be used.
• “Connection to the software
updating server failed” is
displayed when you try to
update the software.
Perform Connection Test (page 42). If “Network connection test
completed successfully.” is displayed, check the proxy server settings
(page 41). Also there may be a problem with the Internet connection.
Contact your Internet service provider.
“OK to grant network access
to BD applications?” is
displayed when a BD-LIVE
compatible disc is read.
This is displayed if the BD-ROM does not have valid BD-LIVE network
access approval. Select No if you do not want to authorize access to the
network.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 59 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
60
En
Others
Software updating is slow. Depending on the Internet connection and other conditions, some time
may be required to update the software.
• “WRT NG ****” is displayed
on the front panel display
during software updating.
(**** meaning any
characters)
• “WRT FAILED” is displayed
on the front panel display
during software updating.
The message is displayed when software updating has failed. Check
again whether it can be updated properly.
A message other than
“Network connection test
completed successfully” is
displayed when Connection
Test is performed.
Is “LAN cable not connected”
displayed?
Check that this player and Ethernet hub (or router with hub
functionality) are properly connected.
• Is “IP address cannot be
obtained.” displayed?
• Is “No response from the
gateway.” displayed?
• If the IP address is obtained using the DHCP server function, check
the setting is correct at the Display Network Configuration
(page 41). For details on the DHCP server function, see the operating
instructions of the Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality).
• Set the IP address manually.
Is “IP address is overlapped.”
displayed?
• Check the operation and settings of the DHCP server function of the
Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality). For details on the DHCP
server function, see the operating instructions of the Ethernet hub (or
router with hub functionality).
• If this player’s has been set manually, reset the IP address of this
player or other components.
Is the Ethernet hub (or router
with hub functionality)
operating properly?
• Check the settings and operation the Ethernet hub (or router with hub
functionality). For details, see the operating instructions of the Ethernet
hub.
• Reboot the Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality).
Problem Check Remedy
The player’s power turns off
automatically.
Is Auto Power Off set to
On?
If Auto Power Off is set to On, the player’s power turns off
automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes
(page 40).
Is Display Power Off set to
On?
The player’s power may turn off together with the power of the TV
connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. If you do not want the player’s
power to turn off when the TV’s power is turned off, set Display Power
Off to Off (page 38).
The player’s power turns on
automatically.
Is KURO LINK set to On? The player’s power may turn on together with the power of the TV
connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. If you do not want the player’s
power to turn on when the TV’s power is turned on, set KURO LINK to
Off (page 38).
Player cannot be operated
with remote control.
Is an AV receiver or amplifier
connected to the CONTROL
IN terminal on the player’s
rear panel?
Operate with the remote control of the device connected to the
CONTROL IN terminal.
Are you operating the remote
control from a point too far
away from the player?
Operate from within 7 m of the remote control sensor.
Are the batteries dead? Replace the batteries (page 6).
Input of connected TV, and
AV system and HD AV
Converter switches
automatically.
Is KURO LINK set to On? The input of the TV, and AV system (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) and
HD AV Converter connected to the HDMI OUT terminal may
automatically switch to the player when playback starts on the player or
the menu screen (Home Media Gallery, etc.) is displayed. If you do not
want the inputs of the connected TV, and AV system (AV receiver or
amplifier, etc.) and HD AV Converter to switch automatically, set KURO
LINK to Off (page 38).
“Processing failed.” is
displayed.
If the message appears repeatedly, please ask your nearest Pioneer
authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
Problem Check Remedy
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 60 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
61
En
07
Glossary
+ Angle (Multi angle)
Up to 9 camera angles can be recorded simultaneously on BD-
ROM or DVD-Video discs, letting you view the same scene from
different angles.
+ AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High
Definition)
See Playing DVDs on page 9.
+ BDAV
Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications for HD
digital broadcast recording is referred to as BDAV on this player
and in this operating instructions.
+ BD-J
See Playing BDs on page 8.
+ BD-LIVE
See Playing BDs on page 8.
+ BDMV
Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications
designed for pre-packaged high definition (HD) movie contents is
referred to as BDMV on this player and in this operating
instructions.
+ BONUSVIEW
See Playing BDs on page 8.
+ Component video output
This video output terminal provides clearer pictures when
connected to a TV equipped with component inputs. Component
video signals consist of three signals, Y, PB and PR.
+ Deep Color
See About HDMI on page 13.
+ Default Gateway
A default gateway is a communication device such as a router
which passes data between networks. It is used to direct data to
networks on which the destination gateway is not explicitly
specified.
+ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol)
This protocol provides configuration parameters (IP address,
etc.) for computers and other devices connected to the network.
+ DivX
See Supported video file formats on page 9.
+ DNS (Domain Name System)
This is a system for associating Internet host names with IP
addresses.
+ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is an audio format to record the sound in up to 5.1
channels with a fraction of the amount of data as compared to
linear PCM audio signals.
Settings you have made have
been cleared.
• Have you disconnected the
power cord while the player’s
power was on?
• Has there been a power
failure?
Always press C STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel or
C STANDBY/ON on the remote control and check that POWER OFF
has turned off from the player’s front panel display before
disconnecting the power cord. Be particularly careful when the power
cord is connected to the AC outlet on another device because the
player turns off in conjunction with the device.
EXT does not light on the
player’s front panel display
when a USB (external
storage) device is connected.
Is the external storage device
properly connected?
• Turn the player’s power off, then turn the power back on.
• Turn the player’s power off, then reconnect the external storage
device (page 16).
Are you using a USB cable
that is longer than 2 meters?
Use a USB cable with a length of 2 meters or less.
Is the power of the external
hard disk turned on?
Turn the player’s power off, then turn the external hard disk’s power on.
Is the external storage device
connected to the USB port via
a memory card reader or USB
hub?
External storage device may not work if connected to the USB port via
a memory card reader or USB hub.
Does the external storage
device contain multiple
partitions?
External storage devices may not be recognized if they contain multiple
partitions.
Some external storage devices may not operate.
EXT flashes on the player’s
front panel display when a
USB (external storage) device
is connected.
Is the external storage device
write-protected?
Turn the player’s power off, then disable the write-protection.
Is the external storage
device’s file system FAT16 or
FAT32?
Only external storage devices with a FAT16 or FAT32 file system can be
used. They may be usable if they are formatted from the player
(page 42).
Turn the player’s power off, then turn the power back on.
Problem Check Remedy
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 61 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
07
62
En
+ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an audio format for high-definition media.
Built on Dolby Digital, it combines the efficiency and flexibility to
provide high quality multi-channel audio. With BD-ROMs, up to
7.1 channels of digital sound can be recorded.
+ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an audio format using lossless coding. With BD-
ROMs, up to 8 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits, or up
to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.
+ DRM
A technology for protecting copyrighted digital data. Digitized
videos, images and audio retain the same quality even when they
are copied or transferred repeatedly. DRM is a technology for
restricting the distribution or playback of such digital data
without the authorization of the copyright holder.
+ DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is an audio format to record 48 kHz/24 bits
audio signals in 5.1 channels.
+ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audio format using lossy
coding. It can record 7.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits.
+ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an audio format using lossless coding.
With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits,
or 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.
+ Ethernet
A standard for local area networks (LANs) used to connect
multiple computers, etc. in the same location. This player
supports 100BASE-TX.
+ Frames and fields
A frame is the unit for one of the still pictures which compose
motion pictures. One frame consists of a picture of odd lines and
a picture of even lines called fields in video signal with interlaced
scan method (576i, 1080i, etc.).
+ HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface)
See About HDMI on page 13.
+ Interactive audio
The audio signals recorded in the titles of BD-ROMs. They include
for example the clicking sound made when the menu screen is
operated.
+ Interlaced scan
With this method, one picture is displayed by scanning it twice.
The odd lines are displayed in the first pass, the even lines are
displayed in the second, to form a single picture (frame).
Interlaced scan is indicated in this player and operating
instructions by an “i” after the resolution value (for example, 576i).
+ IP address
An address that identifies a computer or other device connected
to the Internet or local area network. It is represented a number
in four sections.
+ Linear PCM
This is referred as the audio signals that are not compressed.
+ MAC (Media Access Control) address
A hardware identification number assigned specifically to the
network device (LAN card, etc.).
+ MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group)
The name of a family of standards used to encode video and
audio signals in a digital compressed format. The video encoding
standards include MPEG-1 Video, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visual,
MPEG-4 AVC, etc. The audio encoding standards include MPEG-
1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio, MPEG-2 AAC, etc.
+ Parental Lock
See Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs and
Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs on page 43.
+ Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P)
This is a function for superimposing a sub video on the main
video. Some BD-ROMs include secondary video, which can be
superimposed on the primary video.
+ Port number
This is a sub-address provided below the IP address for
simultaneously connecting to multiple parties during Internet
communications.
+ Progressive scan
With this method, one picture is consisted of a single picture,
without dividing it in two pictures. Progressive scan provides
clear pictures with no flicker, in particular for still pictures that
contain much text, graphics, or horizontal lines. Progressive scan
is indicated in this player and operating instructions by a “p” after
the resolution value (for example, 576p).
+ Proxy server
This is a relay server for ensuring fast access and safe
communications when connecting to the Internet from an
internal network.
+ Region number
See About region numbers on page 9.
+ Secondary audio
Some BD-ROMs include sub audio streams mixed with the main
audio stream. These sub audio streams are called “secondary
audio”. On some discs this secondary audio is recorded as the
audio for the secondary video.
+ Secondary video
Some BD-ROMs include sub videos superimposed on the main
videos using the Picture-in-Picture function. These sub videos are
called “secondary video”.
+ Subnet mask
This is used to identify which part of the IP address corresponds
to the subnet (a separately managed network). The subnet mask
is expressed as “255.255.255.0”.
+ USB(Universal Serial Bus)
USB is the industry standard for connecting peripherals to PCs.
+ VC-1
A video codec developed by Microsoft and standardized by the
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE).
Some BDs include videos encoded in this codec.
+ x.v.Color
See About HDMI on page 13.
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 62 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
63
En
07 Specifications
Note
• The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.
• This product includes FontAvenue
®
fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of
NEC Corporation.
Model BDP-LX52
Type Blu-ray Disc PLAYER
Rated voltage Europe, Australia and New Zealand models: AC 220 V to 240 V
Others: AC 110 V to 240 V
Rated frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption 32 W
Power consumption (standby) 0.3 W
Weight 3.6 kg
External dimensions (including projecting parts) 420 mm (W) x 83 mm (H) x 287 mm (D)
Tolerable operating temperature +5 °C to +35 °C
Tolerable operating humidity 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
O
u
t
p
u
t

t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
s
HDMI 1 set, 19-pin: 5 V, 250 mA
Video outputs Video 1 set, RCA jack: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Component video 1 set, RCA jacks:
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Audio outputs 2-channel (left/right) 1 set, RCA jacks
Audio output level 200 mVrms (1 kHz, –20 dB)
Frequency response 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sampling)
Digital audio outputs Optical 1 set, Optical digital jack
LAN 1 set, Ethernet jack (100BASE-TX)
Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø)
USB 1 set, Type A
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 63 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分
Printed in <VRB1514-A>
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
Please refer to our website for information regarding software updates and service to this product.
Contact information:
U.K.
Pioneer GB LTD.
Hollybush Hill, Stoke Poges Slough, Buckinghamshire SL2 4QP UNITED KINGDOM
0870 600 1539
http://www.pioneer.co.uk/uk/content/support/support/upgrade.html
Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area
Pioneer Electronics Australia Pty Ltd
2211 Princes Highway, Mulgrave, VIC 3170, Australia
1800 988 268
http://www.pioneer.com.au
Hong Kong
Pioneer (HK) Limited - Customer Service Center
Unit 2, 17/F, Vanta Industrial Centre, 21-33 Tai Lin Pai Road, Kwai Chung, Hong Kong
(852) 3583 3288
https://www.pioneerhongkong.com.hk
Singapore
Pioneer Electronics AsiaCentre Pte Ltd
253 Alexandra Road (Komoco Building)#04-01, Lobby 2 Singapore 159936
(65) 6472-7555
http://www.pioneer.com.sg/firmwaredownload
Malaysia
Pioneer Technology (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd
16th Floor, Menara Uni. Asia, 1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
(03) 2697-2920
http://www.pioneer.com.sg/firmwaredownload
Thailand
Pioneer Electronics (Thailand) CO.,LTD
91/1 Floor 1&7 Chaiyo Building, Rama 9 Road, Huaykwang District Bangkok 10320, Thailand
(662) 6439-444
http://www.pioneer.com.sg/firmwaredownload
Taiwan
Pioneer High Fidelity Taiwan Co. Ltd
13th Floor, No.44, Chung Shan North Road, Sec.2 Taipei, Taiwan
(886 2) 2521-3166
http://www.pioneer-twn.com.tw
Indonesia
PT. Adab Alam Electronic
Jl. K.H. Zainul Arifin No. 13A Jakarta-Pusat Indonesia
(21) 6331-924
http://www.pioneer.com.sg/firmwaredownload
LX52_VXJ5_IBD_EN.book 64 ページ 2009年3月3日 火曜日 午後7時29分

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

IMPORTANT
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit

CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING. KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA VARNING DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN. VORSICHT BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! PRECAUCIÓN CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA VARO! NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. 注意 ここを開くと CLASS 3B の可視レーザ光及び不可視レーザ 光が出ます。ビームを直接見たり、触れたりしないこと。

CAUTION

ATTENTION

D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En

VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side).

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully.

WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

2
En

Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En

CAUTION The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En (for example, when on vacation).

POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002*_En

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
For Australia Model

C67-7-3_En

For U.K. model:
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer. If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En

3
En

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries Symbol for equipment These symbols on the products. Pb K058a_A1_En 4 En . please contact your local municipality. For proper treatment. For countries outside the European Union: If you wish to discard these items. Symbol examples for batteries By disposing of these products and batteries correctly. please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation. packaging. you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries. These symbols are only valid in the European Union. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries. your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting via an Ethernet hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . chapters or tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Front Panel Display . . Switching the camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 KURO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the TOOLS menu. . . Playing from a specific time (Time Search) . . . . . . . . Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the secondary video . . . . . . . . . 31 31 31 31 32 32 34 35 35 35 36 36 44 44 45 47 05 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07 Additional information Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Specifications. . 63 03 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) . . . . . . . . . Displaying the disc information . . . . Playing specific titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting video and audio cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skipping content . . . . . Operating the TV with the player’s remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the audio output settings . . Switching the audio and secondary audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 About USB (external storage) devices. . . . Switching the output video resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 06 Advanced settings Changing the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing in slow motion . . 54 Place of installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Condensation . . . . . . . . . Playing in random order (Random Play). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using an optical digital audio cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the video output terminal to be viewed . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting components to the USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Cautions on use . 17 Connecting the power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the player . . . . Step forward and step reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable . . . . . . 6 Types of discs/files that can be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting the USB (external storage) device. . 54 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . chapter or track (Search) . . . . . . . . . Switching the subtitles . . . . . . 17 Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batteries in the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 01 Before you start What’s in the box . . . . . . . 54 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door. . . . . . . . . . 12 Playing from the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19 20 20 21 21 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 30 04 Playback Playing discs or files . . . 60 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing video files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing image files . . . . . . About Play Mode types . . . Operating the Initial Setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . Forward and reverse scanning. . 59 Network . 02 Connecting up Connecting using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About HDMI. Adjusting the audio . . . . . . . . . 54 Moving the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Turn the power off when not using the player . . . . . . . . . Playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 En . . . Software updating . Playing a specific title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

flush it off with large quantities of water. overheat. Also. This can cause batteries to leak. • WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place. as indicated by the polarity marks ( and ). then insert new batteries. • To prevent leakage of battery fluid. wipe it carefully off the inside of the case. • Do not heat batteries. 3 Close the rear cover. • When disposing of used batteries. such as inside a car or near a heater. Australia and New Zealand models: Power cord x 1 Others: Power cord x 2 • When loading the batteries into the remote control. D3-4-2-3-3_En Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. • Batteries may have different voltages. Insert the negative () side first. Caution • Do not use any batteries other than the ones specified. Close securely (a click should be heard). Do not use different kinds of batteries together. do not use a new battery together with an old one. disassemble them. set them in the proper direction. Insert as indicated by the / marks into the battery compartment. please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s rules that apply in your country/area. If the fluid should leak. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). 6 En . even if they look similar. explode or catch fire. remove the batteries if you do not plan to use the remote control for a long period of time (1 month or more). or throw them into flames or water.01 Chapter 1 Before you start What’s in the box • Remote control x 1 • Video/audio cable (yellow/white/red plugs) x 1 • AA/R6 dry cell batteries x 2 • Warranty card • Operating instructions (this document) • U.. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. If a battery should leak and the fluid should get on your skin.K. Press lightly on this part and slide into the direction of the arrow.

Application format Disc type BD-ROM BD3 BD-R4 BD-RE Logo BDMV1    BDAV    DVD-Video    DVD VR    CD-DA DTS-CD    DATA-DISC2    01 DVD-ROM       DVD DVD-R3. 5.4 DVD+RW4             CD-DA (Audio CD) CD CD-R4 CD-RW4 CD-ROM 1.4.0 DVD-RW discs cannot be played. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. 6. 2.5       DVD-RW4. image or audio files are recorded. package or jacket can be played.6       DVD+R3.95 and 4. Including dual-layered discs. 4. Finalize (close) them before playing them on this player.Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the logo marks below indicated on the disc label. 3.7 GB) cannot be played. 7 En . “Blu-ray Disc” and are trademarks. DVD-R for Authoring discs (3.                         Including the AVCHD format. Version 1. Discs on which video.

01

 Discs that cannot be played
• HD DVDs • DVD Audio discs • DVD-RAM discs • SACDs • Video CDs • SVCDs It is possible that some discs other than the ones listed above may not be playable either. Note • Some discs cannot be played, even if one of the logo marks on the previous page is indicated. • To play 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc depression in the center of the disc tray. No adapter is necessary. 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be played.

This player supports BD-ROM Profile 2. BONUSVIEW functions such as playback of secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) and secondary audio can be used. The data used with the BONUSVIEW functions (the secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) and secondary audio data) may be stored in the storage. For details on secondary video and secondary audio playback, refer to the disc’s instructions.

“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie trailers or additional audio and subtitle languages and playing on-line games can be enjoyed over the Internet. The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function (trailers, etc.) is stored in the storage. Refer to the disc’s instructions for details about BD-LIVE functions.

 About audio formats
The following audio formats are supported on this player: • Dolby TrueHD • Dolby Digital Plus • Dolby Digital • DTS-HD Master Audio • DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • DTS Digital Surround • MPEG • MPEG-2 AAC • Linear PCM To enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, it is recommended to connect the player to an AV receiver or amplifier compatible with these audio formats using an HDMI cable. After loading a BD containing sound in one of these audio formats, select the audio format on the menu screen. See About the audio output settings on page 45 for the output conditions of the different formats. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

“BD-LIVE” logo is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use BD-J (Java) applications to create highly interactive titles, for example including games.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. The player’s internal storage has a maximum capacity of roughly 1 GB. Use an external storage connected to the USB port if you want to store large quantities of data (page 16). If a message saying there is not enough storage space appears, erase any unnecessary data (page 42). • BDs (BDAV) compatible with the formats below can be played. – Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 1 – Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 2

 Playing BDs
• BDs (BDMV) compatible with the formats below can be played. – Blu-ray Disc Read-Only (ROM) Format Version 2 – Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 2 – Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 3

8
En

 Playing DVDs

It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer.

01

This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device. The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video camera recorder format recording high-definition onto certain media by using highly efficient codec technologies.

 Playing discs created on computers or BD/DVD recorders
• It may not be possible to play discs recorded using a computer due to the application settings or computer’s environment settings. Record discs in a format playable on this player. For details, contact the dealer. • It may not be possible to play discs recorded using a computer or a BD/DVD recorder, if burn quality is not good due to characteristics of the disc, scratches, dirt on the disc, dirt on the recorder’s lens, etc.

“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

 About region numbers
Blu-ray Disc Player and BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs are assigned region numbers according to the region in which they are sold. This player’s region numbers are: • BD-ROM: – U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B – Others: A • DVD-Video: – U.K. models: 2 – Australia and New Zealand models: 4 – Others: 3 Discs not including these numbers cannot be played. Discs playable on this player are as shown below. • BDs: – U.K., Australia and New Zealand models: B (including B) and ALL – Others: A (including A) and ALL • DVDs: – U.K. models: 2 (including 2) and ALL – Australia and New Zealand models: 4 (including 4) and ALL – Others: 3 (including 3) and ALL

Playable files
Video, image and audio files recorded on DVDs and CDs can be played. Caution • In DVD, only the one recorded by the ISO 9660 file system can be played. • Some files may not be playable. • For some files, it may not be possible to use certain functions during playback. • It may not be possible to play some files, even if they have the extension of a file playable on this player. • Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played (not including DivX VOD files).

 Supported video file formats
• DivX DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified or DivX Ultra Certified device that plays DivX video. Conform to the size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480 pixels. DivX files encoded with GMC/Qpel option cannot be played. Only audio signals with MP3 or Dolby Digital (AC3) format are output. Note that files other than the ones containing DivX video cannot be played, even if they have the extension “.avi”.

 Playing CDs
Regarding copy protected CDs: This player is designed to conform to the specifications of the Audio CD format. This player does not support the playback or function of discs that do not conform to these specifications.

 DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content — video, audio, etc. — while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The DVD side of a DualDisc can be played on this player (excluding any DVD-Audio content). The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compatible with this player.

DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under license. – Plays DivX® video

9
En

01

Note • This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the message Authorization Error will be displayed and your content will not play.] Learn more at www.divx.com/vod. – This player’s DivX VOD registration code can be checked at Initial Setup  Playback  DivX VOD  Registration Code (page 39). – The number of views is restricted for some DivX VOD files. When such files are played on this player, the remaining number of views is displayed. Files for which the remaining number of views has reached 0 cannot be played (Rental Expired is displayed). Files for which the number of views is not restricted can be played as many times as you like (the remaining number of views is not displayed).

Part Names and Functions
Remote Control
STANDBY/ON

1
TV CONTROL

OPEN/CLOSE

15

2 4 3

INPUT SELECT

CH

VOL

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

ANGLE FL DIMMER

16

17

5
CLEAR ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO

6 7 8 9 10

VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY

18
POPUP MENU
MENU

DISPLAY

20 22

19 21

TOP MENU

TOOLS

 Supported image file formats
• JPEG File format: JFIF Ver. 1.02/Exif Ver. 2.2 Resolution: Up to 4096 x 4096 pixels Only baseline JPEG files are supported.

ENTER

HOME MENU

RETURN

11
PLAY

23
PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT

12 13 14

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

BLUE

 Supported audio file formats
• Windows Media™ Audio 9 (WMA9) Bit rate: Up to 192 kbps Sampling frequencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. • MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps Sampling frequencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz 1 2 3 4 5

VIDEO ADJUST

BD PLAYER

 STANDBY/ON – Press to turn the power on and off. TV CONTROL – (page 19) AUDIO – (page 26) SUBTITLE – (page 25) Number buttons – Use these to select and play the title/chapter/track you want to view or listen to and to select items from menus. CLEAR – Press to clear the numeric number, etc. ENTER – Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc.

 Playable file extensions
• Video files .divx and .avi • Image files .jpg and .jpeg • Audio files .wma and .mp3

6

SECONDARY AUDIO – (page 26) SECONDARY VIDEO – (page 26)

10
En

14 VIDEO ADJUST – (page 34) 15  OPEN/CLOSE – Press to open and close the disc tray. the brightness of the player’s front panel display and the status of the indicators on the player’s front panel changes.  OPEN/CLOSE – Press to open and close the disc tray. 17 ANGLE – (page 25) 18 OUTPUT RESOLUTION – (page 21) 19 PLAY MODE – (page 28) 20 POP UP MENU/MENU – Press to display the BDROM or DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLAY – (page 26) 22 23 TOOLS – (page 20) RETURN – Press to return to the previous screen. Press and hold to start reverse scanning (page 25). 11 HOME MENU – (page 36)  PAUSE – (page 24)  STOP – (page 24)  PREV/ NEXT – (page 25) // – (page 25) // – (page 25) 13 RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE – Use these to navigate BD-ROM menus.7 8 9 VIDEO SELECT – (page 21) HOME MEDIA GALLERY – (page 31) TOP MENU – Press to display the top menu of the BDROM or DVD-Video. If this happens.  – Press during playback to pause. When the power is on. etc. Front panel display PQLS indicator – (page 14) 5 6 7 8 9 10 HDMI indicator – (page 13) 11  – Press to start playback. The player may have trouble capturing remote control signals if there is a fluorescent light nearby. 16 FL DIMMER – When pressed. When the power is on. Press again to restart playback. This lights when an HDMI-compatible device is connected to an HDMI OUT terminal (page 13). Press and hold to start forward scanning (page 25). then operate it within approximately 7 m. 11 En . ENTER – Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed. Bright Bright Dark Off Lit Lit Lit Off Lit Lit Lit Off Off Off Off Lit 12  PLAY – (page 24) 1. the above button indicators are lit.  – Press to stop playback. the indicator is lit. change settings and move the cursor. / – Press to skip to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/file. move the player away from the fluorescent light. FL OFF indicator – Lights when the player’s front panel display is turned off pressing FL DIMMER. 4 Remote control sensor – Point the remote control to this. / – Press to skip to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/track/file. Disc tray Blu-ray indicator – Lights when the power is turned on. Indicators Front panel display Bright Medium Dark Off Front panel buttons Lit Lit Lit Off Blu-ray PQLS HDMI1 FL OFF 01 10 /// – Use to select items. Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3  STANDBY/ON – Press to turn the power on and off.

EXT – (page 16) CONTROL – (page 14) Rear Panel 1 2 3 RS-232 C COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT Y PB PR CONTROL IN LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO AC IN 9 8 7 6 5 4 1 2 AUDIO OUT terminals – (page 16) VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO – (page 16) COMPONENT VIDEO – (page 16) AC IN – (page 17) CONTROL IN terminal – Use to control this player from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the  mark. 1080/24p. It also lights when a component video cable is connected and video signals are being output with a resolution of 1080/60i or 720/60p. 3 4 12 En . etc. 24HZ/50HZ/60HZ – The frequency of the video frame or field being output lights. elapsed time. The remote will not work correctly when pointed at this player. 1080/60p or 720/60p.01 Front Panel Display 1 2 3 4 HD LAN CONTROL EXT 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ 8 7 6 5 1 2 3  – (page 24)  – (page 24) HD – This lights when an HDMI cable is connected and video signals are being output with a resolution of 1080/50i. point the remote control toward the connected component (such as an AV receiver or amplifier). 1080/60i. 5 6 7 8 9 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminal – (page 16) HDMI OUT terminal – (page 15) USB (BD STORAGE) port – (page 16) LAN (100) terminal – (page 17) RS-232C terminal – This terminal is not used. • When connected via System Control. 4 5 6 7 8 LAN – (page 17) Character display – Displays the title/chapter/track number. Caution • Be sure to connect cables for outputting the audio and video signals. • You cannot use System Control with components that do not have a System Control terminal or with components manufactured by companies other than Pioneer. 720/50p. Connect the CONTROL OUT terminal of the other component to CONTROL IN on this player using a mini-plug cord (commercially available). 1080/50p.

“x. expands color reproduction  About the HDMI High Speed Transmission This player outputs 1080/50p. 1080/50p. and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. 720/50p. the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing. etc. make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 18). If your TV supports 1080/50p. This product is compatible with “x. The conventional players can transmit a video signal with 8 bit color depth in the YCbCr 4:4:4 or RGB formats. Also refer to the operating instructions of the device being connected.v. 1080/24p. HDMI.Color” that have the capability to realize a wide-gamut color space based on the xvYCC specifications. Subtle color gradations can be reproduced when connected to a TV that supports Deep Color. • The HDMI indicator on the player’s front panel lights when an HDMI-compatible device is connected to an HDMI OUT terminal (page 11)..Color” is a promotion name given to the products that have the capability to realize a wide-gamut color space based on the international standard specifications defined as xvYCC. • 1080p video signals may not be output.v. use a High Speed HDMI™ cable in order to take advantage of the maximum performance the player and TV can offer. • • • • • • • • About HDMI This player incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology. High Speed HDMI™ cables are tested to carry signals up to 1080p.v. Also set HDMI High Speed Transmission to On (page 38). Note • Make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu according to connected HDMI-compatible device (page 18). depending on the HDMI cable being used. capabilities. allowing natural colors to be reproduced more faithfully than ever. 1080/60p and Deep Color video signals. 1080/50i.  Audio signals that can be transferred with the player’s HDMI OUT terminal Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS Digital Surround MPEG-2 AAC Linear PCM Linear PCM audio signals meeting the following conditions can be output: – Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz – Number of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sampling frequency) For details. 13 En . 1080/60p or Deep Color signals. the players supporting Deep Color can transmit a video signal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. 1080/60p and 720/60p video signals that are capable of Deep Color can also be carried. see About the audio output settings on page 45. 1080/60i. Playing video signals conforming to “xvYCC” standards on this player when connected to an “x. After connecting. LLC.v. “x. The player supports Deep Color.Color”compatible TV. 02 Connecting using an HDMI cable The audio and video signals can be transferred to HDMIcompatible devices as digital signals with no loss of sound or video quality.Chapter 2 Connecting up Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet whenever making or changing connections.Color”.

if the Flat Screen TV’s power was off. Functions operated from the TV Such player operations as starting and stopping playback and displaying the menus can be performed from the Flat Screen TV. • For some models. • This player is designed for connection with HDMIcompatible devices. This function is available only when playback is stopped and the menu screen is not displayed. (Also check after changing the connected devices and reconnecting HDMI cables. its power turns on automatically. • The KURO LINK function operates when KURO LINK is set to On for all devices connected with HDMI cables. you can have the player’s on-screen display language change automatically to that of the Flat Screen TV. AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. 96 kHz or 192 kHz multi-channel audio signals are output as linear PCM 2-channel audio signals (page 45). for example) that are not compatible with HDCP. DVDs. • The KURO LINK function works when KURO LINK is set to On on the player (page 38). • Use High Speed HDMI™ cables when using the KURO LINK function. the playback picture. etc.) and HD AV Converter when playback is started on the player or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed. • The player supports the “PQLS 2ch Audio” function that is only activated when playing audio CDs (CDDAs). etc.  About PQLS function The PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a transfer control technology using the KURO LINK function. the player’s power automatically turns off. the KURO LINK function may be referred to as “HDMI Control”. be sure to check that the player’s picture is output to the Flat Screen TV. The KURO LINK function may not operate properly if other HDMI cables are used. The player’s output signals are controlled from the AV receiver or amplifier to achieve high quality sound playback using the quartz oscillator of AV receiver or amplifier. etc.02 Note • Set HDMI High Speed Transmission to Off when using an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI™ cable (a Standard HDMI™ cable).) with audio output in linear PCM. HDCP is a specification to protect audiovisual content across the DVI/HDMI interface. etc. When the Flat Screen TV’s power is turned off. – If the output video resolution is set to Auto. 14 En . it may not operate properly.  To use the KURO LINK function • The KURO LINK function only works when outputting video signals from the HDMI OUT terminal. Once connections and the settings of all the devices are finished. etc. the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery appears on the Flat Screen TV. Auto-select function The input switches automatically on the Flat Screen TV. • No audio signals are output. • The following restrictions apply when HDMI High Speed Transmission is set to Off: – Deep Color signals are not output. When connected to a DVI device. Simultaneous power function When playback on the player is started or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed. • The Simultaneous power function is activated when the player is set as follows (page 38): Display Power On: On Display Power Off: On  When connected to a DVI device • It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays. Unified language function When the language information from a connected Flat Screen TV is received. Note • CONTROL on the player’s front panel display lights when the KURO LINK function is activated (page 12). – When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p. Caution • Also refer to the operating instructions of the Flat Screen TV. Connect using an audio cable. it may not operate properly depending on the DVI device. Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio audio signals are output as Dolby Digital. About KURO LINK function The functions listed below work when a Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible Flat Screen TV.) or HD AV Converter is connected to the player using an HDMI cable. • When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected. AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. and the “PQLS Multi Surround” function that is activated when playing all discs (BDs. the signals are output with a resolution of 1080/50i or 1080/60i when TV’s preferred resolution is 1080/50p or 1080/60p. When the input is switched. DTS Digital Surround or linear PCM signals. AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. This eliminates the influence of the jitter generated upon transfer which can adversely affect the sound quality.) and HD AV Converter.) The KURO LINK function may not operate properly if the player’s picture is not properly output to the Flat Screen TV.

Dolby Digital Plus. refer to the operating instructions of AV receiver or amplifier. It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable (below). (Depending on your TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. and when the player is set as follows (page 38): HDMI Audio Out: PCM KURO LINK: On PQLS: Auto • Also refer to the operating instructions of AV receiver or amplifier. • Placing a load on the plug could result in faulty contact and no video signals being output. Caution • Hold the plug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. • Please see the Pioneer website for AV receivers or amplifiers that support the PQLS function. • Placing a load on the plug could result in faulty contact and no video signals being output. The function will work again once playback has been stopped then restarted. 15 En . it could happen that not all of the functions will work. TV Direction of signal flow Connecting a TV See Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier below to connect an AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable.• The “PQLS 2ch Audio” function is only activated when a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the “PQLS 2ch Audio” function is connected directly to the player’s HDMI OUT terminal using an HDMI cable. TV Direction of signal flow  About connections to components of other makes supporting the KURO LINK function The functions listed below work when a TV or AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. Caution • Hold the plug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. etc. For instructions on connecting the TV and speakers to the AV receiver or amplifier. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surround.) • Functions operated from the TV • Auto-select function • Simultaneous power function • Unified language function Please see the Pioneer website for the latest information on brands and model numbers of other brands that support the KURO LINK function. DTS-HD Master Audio. Dolby Digital.). Player’s rear panel RS-232 C COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT 02 Y PB PR CONTROL IN LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an AV receiver or amplifier in order to enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD. Caution • If the output video resolution is switched. the PQLS function may not work. Note • The PQLS indicator on the player’s front panel lights when the PQLS function is activated (page 12). etc. and when the player is set as follows (page 38): KURO LINK: On PQLS: Auto • The “PQLS Multi Surround” function is only activated when a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the “PQLS Multi Surround” function is connected directly to the player’s HDMI OUT terminal using an HDMI cable. Player’s rear panel RS-232 C HDMI cable (commercially available) To HDMI input terminal Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight. COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT Y PB PR CONTROL IN LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO HDMI cable (commercially available) HDMI cable (commercially available) To HDMI input terminal AV receiver or amplifier From HDMI output terminal To HDMI input terminal Match the direction of the plug to the terminal and insert straight.) supporting the player’s KURO LINK function is connected to the player using an HDMI cable.

• External storage devices may not be recognized if they contain multiple partitions. • When connected to the TV using a component video cable. external hard disks. etc. also connect the video output terminals. video signals are not output with a resolution of 1080/50i. 1080/24p or 1080/60p. A component cable or three commercially available video cables can be used instead of the video cable (yellow plug) of the included video/audio cable for connection. • USB 2.) is not guaranteed. contact the manufacturer of your TV. For details. Player’s rear panel COMPONENT VIDEO Optical digital audio cable (commercially available) To optical digital audio input terminal AV receiver or amplifier To audio input terminals 2-channel analog audio can also be connected. About USB (external storage) devices The USB (external storage) devices that can be connected to the player are as shown below. Connecting components to the USB port The data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and the data used with the BONUSVIEW function when playing BD-ROMs can be stored on a device connected to the USB port (external storage). 16 En . • Depending on the output video resolution setting. Direction of signal flow Note • To switch the video from the AV receiver or amplifier. • Some external storage devices may not operate with this player. • Operation of external storage devices (USB memory devices. the picture may not be displayed properly due to the copy protection when the player is connected to a TV with a built-in video deck. 1080/50p. • To output video signals from this player. Note • Video signals are output with a resolution of 576/50i or 480/60i when connected using a video cable. Connect the audio signals using an optical digital audio cable or an audio cable (2 channels) (below).02 Connecting video and audio cables Note • Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 18). Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using an optical digital audio cable Player’s rear panel RS-232 C COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT Y PB PR CONTROL IN LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO White Video/audio cable (included) Red Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable Caution • Connect the player’s video output directly to your TV. 720/50p. minimum 1 GB capacity (2 GB or more recommended) Note Yellow Video/audio cable (included) White To video/audio input terminals To component video input terminals TV • Devices formatted with a file system other than the above cannot be used. Furthermore. connect using one of the following (not including when connected using an HDMI cable): a component video cable or a video cable.0-compatible memory devices or hard disks • FAT16 or FAT32 file system. Such devices may however be usable if they are formatted from the player. the picture may not be output (page 21). Therefore the picture may not be displayed properly if connected to a TV via a DVD recorder/video deck or when playing the player’s output material that is recorded by a DVD recorder/ video deck. This player supports analog copy protection technology. Y PB PR CONTROL IN Direction of signal flow Red R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO It is also possible to connect to an AV receiver or amplifier.

etc. set the plug in the proper direction for the port and insert it horizontally. This internal storage cannot be used when an external storage device is connected.Connecting the USB (external storage) device Caution • Be sure to turn the player’s power off before connecting or disconnecting external storage devices. The player’s software can also be updated over the Internet (page 44). • When connecting the USB cable. Y PB PR CONTROL IN LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO USB memory device. Otherwise. Player’s rear panel RS-232 C COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT Connecting via an Ethernet hub The player can be connected to an Ethernet hub using a LAN cable. • If there is an available DHCP server in your local area network. hold onto the plug. making it impossible to write data on the external storage device. see page 41. 17 En . Please contact your Internet service provider or network device manufacturer. Player’s rear panel RS-232 C COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL OUT 02 Y PB PR C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) OPTICAL HDMI OUT R AUDIO L OUTPUT VIDEO LAN cable (commercially available) Ethernet hub (router with hub functionality) LAN 3 2 1 WAN Modem Internet Note • LAN on the player’s front panel display lights when there is an active local area network (LAN) connection (page 12). be sure to disable the write-protection. • When using an external hard disk as the external storage device. • If the external storage device is write-protected. UT PR CONTROL IN VIDEO AC IN • Use a USB cable with a length of 2 meters or less. Connect an Ethernet hub (or a router with hub functionality) that is connected to the Internet to the player. you may have to set the individual network configuration manually. • Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your connected equipment. • Use empty external storage devices (on which nothing is stored). the IP address is obtained automatically. etc. • When a USB memory device or external hard disk is connected and the player’s power is turned on. • Placing excessive loads on the plug may result in poor contact. be sure to turn on the hard disk’s power before turning on the player’s power. To wall outlet Power cord (included) Network connection BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie trailers or additional audio and subtitle languages and playing on-line games can be enjoyed over the Internet. • For some Internet service providers. • The player is equipped with an internal storage. USB cable (commercially available) Hard disk. Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after all the connections between devices have been completed. Be sure to use a 100BASE-TX compatible Ethernet hub or router. In this case. Player’s rear panel Note • The EXT indicator on the player’s front panel display lights when data can be stored on the external storage (page 12). do not unplug the power cord. NT VIDEO • Devices may not work if connected to the USB port via a memory card reader or USB hub. set IP address manually (page 41).

turn on the power of the devices connected to the player before turning on the player’s power. check that the connections between the player and other devices are correct. subtitle and BDMV/DVD-Video menu language will also be set. • The video and audio signals output from the set output terminals are output synchronously (lip synchronization). 1 Turn on the TV’s power and switch the input. 18 En 3 Select the OSD language. then press ENTER. Caution • Before turning on the power. 4 Select and set the video and audio output terminals. • The screen in step 11 and test tones are output simultaneously according to the settings in steps 4 to 7. Follow the procedure below to redo the connections.03 Chapter 3 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be sure to perform these settings when using the player for the first time.  If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed  Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu. • When using a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or front projector compatible with the KURO LINK function. When a Pioneer Flat Screen TV that is compatible with KURO LINK is connected to this player’s HDMI OUT terminal. Note • When a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or front projector compatible with the KURO LINK function is connected to the player using an HDMI cable. Select the actually connected video and audio output terminals. an optical digital audio cable (page 16). Press  STANDBY/ON. or a TV using either analog audio cables. then press ENTER. TOP MENU TOOLS Example (U. Use /// to select. Audio. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is displayed. the player is automatically set to the optimum picture quality for the connected device. Setting item Video Audio HDMI Output terminal name HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO OUT VIDEO HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO ANALOG AUDIO Caution ENTER HOME MENU RETURN • When HDMI is selected for Video. then press ENTER. Also. no sound is output if HDMI is selected at Audio. then select the proper connection at the setup screen. Lower the volume of the devices connected with the player. – When connecting using component video cables or a video cable to watch the picture. • When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected at Video. models): Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. select Initial Setup  Setup Navigator  Start. no video signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal. set KURO LINK to On on the connected device before turning on the player’s power. no video signals are output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals. language settings are imported from the Pioneer Flat Screen TV’s language settings before Setup Navigator begins.K. • When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected at Video. . Use / to select. See the TV’s operating instructions for instructions on operating the TV. 2 Turn on the player’s power. connect to an AV receiver or amplifier.

the player sets the picture quality automatically. For details. 8 Select the PQLS. Select Proceed. then press ENTER. To redo the settings from the start. 10 Output test tones. If a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or projector is connected to the player and HDMI is selected for Video in step 4. The picture and sound may not be output properly if any other HDMI cable (for example a standard HDMI™ cable) or an HDMI cable with built-in equalizer is used. 5 Select and set the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting for the HDMI OUT terminal. • If you make a mistake when inputting the code. 03 Operating the TV with the player’s remote control When the manufacturer code for your brand of TV is set on the player’s remote control. When HDMI High Speed Transmission for the HDMI OUT terminal is set to On. Note • The factory setting is 00 (PIONEER). 19 En . • When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Audio. linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output from all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio. 9 Check the settings. the setup returns to step 4 if there is no operation for over 30 seconds. • The PQLS function works when linear PCM audio signals are output. Note • Only when a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier is connected . Once the setup returns to step 4. Therefore the linear PCM audio signals obtained by decoding all audio signals are output from HDMI OUT terminal. see Switching the output video resolution on page 21. Use / to select the connected component. release TV CONTROL  then start over from the beginning. the TV can be operated using the player’s remote control. then press ENTER. For steps 5 to 8. HDMI Audio Out: PCM KURO LINK: On PQLS: Auto • For details on the PQLS function. About PQLS function on page 14. Depending on the output terminal setting of step 4 or the HDMI cable being used. 6 Select the output video resolution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. For details on the resolution settings. Use / to select Yes.– To listen to audio with the player connected to an AV receiver or amplifier with an HDMI cable. use a High Speed HDMI™ cable. Use / to select. then press ENTER. select Go Back. the manual picture quality setting screen appears. When the automatic picture quality setting screen does not appear. PQLS Screen appears. 11 Finish the Setup Navigator menu. reset it. then press ENTER. Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the code while pressing TV CONTROL . the player is set to the settings below. Use / to select. Use / to select Finish. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR AUDIO VIDEO ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION 1 Input the 2-digit manufacturer code. then press ENTER. Press ENTER. The automatic picture quality setting screen appears. connect the TV to the AV receiver or amplifier using an HDMI cable (page 15). 12 Checking the picture quality settings or setting the picture quality. it may happen that no picture and/or sound is output. Caution • For some models it may not be possible to operate the TV with the player’s remote control. If this happens. • When HDMI or DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Audio. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. even for TVs of brands listed on the manufacturer code list. then press ENTER. see About the audio output settings on page 45. Use / to select. redo the settings according to the connected devices and the HDMI cable being used. 7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV. no audio signals are output from the HDMI OUT or DIGITAL OUT terminals. the step to which you should proceed depends on the combination of the Video and Audio settings. • The setting may be restored to the default after the batteries are replaced. • When Use is select. If this happens. Use / to select.

63 THORN 31. 26. 10. 56. 54. 23. 67. 15. 36 BASIC LINE 41. 07. 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31. 42. 40. 41. 42. 51 SAISHO 39. 44. 07. 07. 44 AMSTRAD 42. 46 ICE 46. 45. 46. 09 REDIFFUSION 32. 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07. 39. 53 HANSEATIC 07. 46. 53. 53 MITSUBISHI 09. 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07. 33. 44. 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07. 43. 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31. 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31. 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32. 39. 44 BAUR 31. INPUT SELECT – Press to switch the TV’s input. 32. 39. 08. 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40. 44. 44. 21. 42 PHILIPS 31. 52. 42 JEC 05 JVC 13. 54 FINLUX 32. 58 GBC 32. 32. 37. 07. 51. 27. 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42. 46. 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31. 52 OCEANIC 31. 91 SBR 07. 46 FRONTECH/PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40. 42. 22 PATHO CINEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32. 36. 47 IMPERIAL 38. 23. 46 ROADSTAR 41. 47. 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31. 42. 07. 34. 41. 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07.03 • When there are multiple codes for a manufacturer. 11. 42 GRANADA 07. 14. 70 SANYO 35. 36. 32. 44 HINARI 07. 25. 44. 49 SELECO 31. 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07. 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07. 02. 07. 07. 32. 46 SABA 31. 44. 22 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32. 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07. 34. 40. 42 ORION 32. 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TELEFUNKEN 36. CH +/– – Press to select the TV channel. 45. 46. 38. 28. 03. 42. 31 MULTITECH 44. 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31. 48 LIESENK&TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32. 42. 36. 45. 21. 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31. 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31. TV Preset code list Manufacturer Code(s) PIONEER 00. 02 RBM 53 RCA 01. 61. 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07. 38. 42 REX 31. 46 ZENITH 03. 23 KAISUI 18. 35. 51. 42 FRONTECH 31. 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32. 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31. 47. 51. 42 GE 00. 01. 40 OSAKI 41. 42. 41 GOLDSTAR 10. 46. 32. 41. 10. 07. 43 M-ELECTRONIC 31. 42. 42. 43. 07. 39. 42. 39. 21. 45. 48. 07. 40. 48 GELOSO 32. 44. 42. 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41. 42. 51 MAGNADYNE 32. TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER HOME MENU RETURN 20 En . 51 FINLANDIA 35. 45 FORMENTI 32. 08. 42 HCM 18. 10. 53 R-LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10. 32. 48. 2 Check that the TV can be operated. VOL +/– – Press to adjust the volume. 56. 46. 36. try inputting them in the indicated order until the TV can be operated. 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32. 42 SHARP 02. 02.  – Press to turn the TV’s power on and off. 07. 46. 41 THOMSON 36. 62. 54 FIRSTLINE 40. 07. 07. 42. 32. 42. 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07. 42. 40. 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07. 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07. 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07. 17. 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07. 17. 49 QUELLE 31. 18 GEC 07. 34. 42. 21. 36. 07. 48. 42 INTERVISION 46. 38. 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUPUNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07. 41. 41. 41. 02. 54 VESTEL 07 VICTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32. Operate the TV using TV CONTROL. 54. 06. 12. 10. 42. 47 SEG 42. 48 DIXI 07. 19. 46 SALORA 31. 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31. 44. 36. 10. 35. 44. 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31. 18. 45. 29 MANESTH 39. 44 SONOLOR 31. 90 SIAREM 32. 35. 50 GOODMANS 07. 07. 43. 44 FISHER 32. 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07. 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05. 42. 16. 47. 21. 46 SEI 32. 48 GRADIENTE 30. 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUNK 31. 52 NORDMENDE 32. 31. 41. 44 PROTECH 07. 07 NEI 07. 18. 42 NIKKAI 05. 07. 24. 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32. 20 Using the TOOLS menu Various functions can be called out according to the player’s operating status. 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38. 69. 02. 45.

Switch the BD-ROM/DVD-Video disc’s camera angles (page 25). SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION 03 2 Select and set the item. Add the selected track or file to the HMG Playlist (page 32). no audio and video signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal. Output video resolution setting of selected video output terminal Example: Video Output Terminal  HDMI (Source Direct)  • The video output terminal setting can also be switched by pressing   /  on the player’s front panel. Display the audio adjustment menu (page 35). track or file from the start. 1080/60i. Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) (page 26).  To change the setting of the selected item Use / to change. Switch the output video resolution from the various output terminals (page 21).1 Display the TOOLS menu. etc. no video signals are output from the other video output terminals. The items that can be selected depend on the player’s status. • The current video output terminal is displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard). 1080/60p or 720/60p from the HDMI OUT terminal or COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. press /. If this happens. Switch the DVD-R/-RW’s (VR format) list screen between the original list and the playlist. the picture may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9. DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU TOP MENU TOOLS  Press VIDEO SELECT. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY  TOOLS menu item list Item Description Play from Beginning Play the selected title. 1080/24p. AV receiver or amplifier. Use / to select. Caution • On some devices (TV. Display the Play Mode screen (page 28).  To close the TOOLS menu Press TOOLS or RETURN. Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary audio (page 26). Switching the output video resolution Use the procedure below to switch the output video resolution from the various video output terminals. Rotate the image while playing a slideshow (page 32). Switch the subtitles (page 25). then press ENTER. Add to HMG Playlist Delete from HMG Playlist Output Video Resolution 21 En . • When video signals are being output with a resolution of 1080/50i. • When a video output terminal other than the HDMI OUT terminal is selected. • When the HDMI OUT terminal is selected. 720/50p.). Delete the selected track or file from the HMG Playlist (page 33). Caution • The picture may not be displayed for a while when the video output terminal is switched. the video or audio may not be output properly when the resolution is switched. Slideshow Play Mode Video Adjust Secondary Video Subtitle Angle Rotate Audio Adjust Audio Secondary Audio Now Playing Original/Play List Play a slideshow of the image files on the selected disc or folder. Display the playback screen of the currently playing track or file. 1080/50p. use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set a resolution at which the video and audio are properly output. Display the picture quality adjustment screen (page 34). Note • Items that cannot be changed are displayed in gray. Angle Audio Subtitle Audio Adjust Video Adjust Press BD PLAYER TOOLS Switching the video output terminal to be viewed Use the procedure below to switch the video output signal to be viewed between the HDMI OUT terminal and an analog output terminal (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals). Switch the audio (page 26). TOOLS. To switch the video output terminals.

03 • The picture may not be displayed for a while when the resolution is switched. then press the  OPEN/CLOSE button on the front panel while pressing the  button to switch to a different frame/field frequency. The frame/field frequency and TV system settings do not change even when the power is turned off. CLEAR SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU Eject the disc. When sources with a frame/field frequency of 60 Hz or 24 Hz are played.K. Others: By factory default setting. and the video signal output from the VIDEO output terminals is set to be output in the PAL TV system format. If the picture is not displayed on the TV when a source with a different frame/field frequency is played. these materials include 1080/24p. They cannot be output from other video terminals.  About Film material The film material is a video signal with a frame rate of 24 frames/second. the output frame/field frequency automatically switches to 60 Hz (or 24 Hz for HDMI. To switch the output video resolution. the frame/field frequency is set for an output of 60 Hz. etc. 22 En . and the video signal output from the VIDEO output terminals is set to be output in the PAL TV system format.  About the frame/field frequency and NTSC/PAL TV systems U. set the output video resolution to either Auto or Source Direct. the signals are output as such. use the procedure below to switch the frame/field frequency and TV system settings for the signal output from the player. and the TV system format for the video signal output from the VIDEO output terminals depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. The indicator for the frame frequency’s current setting lights on the front panel display (page 12). They only switch when a video material with a different frame/field frequency is played. When playback is stopped. 720/24p video signals are output at 60 frames/second. • The output video resolution setting can also be switched by selecting Output Video Resolution from the TOOLS menu. Australia and New Zealand models: By factory default setting. and the TV system format for the video signal output from the VIDEO output terminals depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. the picture is output at 60 frames/second if your TV is not compatible with 1080/ 24p signals. even if your TV is not compatible with 1080/24p signals. When sources with a frame/field frequency of 50 Hz are played. press OUTPUT RESOLUTION again or press /.  To output film material To output 1080/24p film material from HDMI OUT terminal. The frame/field frequency switches between 50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this operation is performed. the frame/field frequency is set for an output of 50 Hz. Caution Example: Video resolution of the currently playing disc Output Video Resolution  Auto  Source : 1080/50i Current Output : 1080/50i Output video resolution from the player • 1080/24p signals can only be output from the HDMI OUT terminal. use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set an output video resolution at which the video and audio signals are properly output.  Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION. the frame/field frequency and TV system settings remain at the settings last used. • The current output video resolution setting is displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display.. For example. • When Auto is selected. • When Source Direct is selected. the output frame/field frequency automatically switches to 50 Hz. 720/24p. depending on the setting). • The output video resolution depends on the video output terminal (page 23). If the picture is not displayed properly. • Even if Auto or Source Direct is selected.

the pictures may not be output.6 576/50i 480/60i 576p or 480p 576/50p 480/60p 1080i 1080/50i 1080/60i 1080p3 1080/50p10. Depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting (page 37). Sources with a resolution of 720/50p. etc. Resolution recorded 576/50i on disc9.11 1080/60p 10. 6. Depending on the BD.) connected to HDMI OUT terminal. The pictures are output with the preferred output resolution of the device (TV. Depending on the connected TV.5. Output video resolution setting Auto3 576i or 480i HDMI1 HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO output terminals Resolution preferred No video signals are output by TV4. For details on the output of film material (1080/24p or 720/24p video signals). 3. 12. About the output video resolution The output video resolution setting and the resolution of the picture that is actually output differ for the different terminals.12.11 03 COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO1 HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals2 No video signals are output — 576/50i 480/60i 576/50p 480/60p 576/50p 1080/60i8. AV receiver or amplifier. Depending on the connected HDMI cable. 11. 5. Sources with a resolution of 720/50p.9 — VIDEO output terminal2 — 576/50i 480/60i 576/50i 480/60i 576/50i 480/60i — (TV system) — PAL 7 PAL 7 PAL 7 — Source Direct Resolution recorded on disc5. 1080/24p film material is output at 1080/60i. see To output film material on page 22. the resolutions when the source’s frame/field frequency is 60 Hz and 24 Hz on the lower line.14 480/60i PAL 7 The video output terminal set at Video in the Setup Navigator (page 18) or the video output terminal selected with VIDEO SELECT (page 21). 10. 7. This cannot be selected when the video output terminal is set to COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO.13. 9. 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/50i or 1080/60i even if the TV’s recommended resolution is 1080/50p or 1080/60p. 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/50i or 1080/60i. 4. 23 En .13 1. 2. the video signals may not be output. 8.12. the video signals may not be output. The table below shows the output video resolution for the different terminals when the frame/field frequency of the playback source is 50 Hz on the upper line. DVD-Video or DVD-R/-RW (VR format) may be output at 480/60p. 720/24p film material is output at 720/60p. 14. See the table below. 13. BD-ROM or BD-R/-RE may be output at 480/60p.

The contents of the disc menu and the way to operate differ from disc to disc. the point at which the disc stopped is stored in the memory. see Playable discs on page 7. Video. • For audio CDs and audio files. press  STOP while playback is stopped. playback starts from the beginning of the track/file that was playing. see page 43. • To stop. • For some BD-R/-RE. • To pause. image and audio files recorded on discs are played with the Home Media Gallery (page 31). – When the power is turned off. TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER  If the disc menu is displayed For some discs. press  STOP during playback. When  PLAY is pressed. For the types of files that can be played. the type of disc is displayed on the player’s front panel display. 3 Press  PLAY to play the disc. (For BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the resume playback function. • Check Troubleshooting on page 55 if video or audio signals are not being output properly. • To cancel the resume playback function. playback protection is set for the disc or titles. playback resumes from that point. playback starts from the image file last displayed. • DVD-Video discs have parental lock features. For the types of discs that can be played. Note • Load the disc with the printed side facing up. DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW 1 Press  STANDBY/ON to turn on the power.  on the player’s front panel display lights when playback is paused. • If the stop mode was set while playing a slideshow of image files. For details. Note • The resume playback function is canceled automatically in the following cases: – When the disc tray is opened. see Playable files on page 9. – When the file list window is switched.) • The resume playback function cannot be used for some discs. Turn the TV’s power on and switch its input beforehand. the disc menu is displayed automatically when playback starts.04 Chapter 4 Playback Playing discs or files This section describes the player’s main operations. press  PAUSE during playback. Input the code number set for the disc to unlock the protection.  on the player’s front panel display lights during playback. 24 En . Once reading is completed. Input the password registered in the player’s settings to unlock the parental lock. • Several dozen seconds are required to read the disc. 2 Press  OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and load the disc. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE Note • Some discs start playing automatically when the disc tray is closed. CLEAR SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY  Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) • When  STOP is pressed during playback.

• The scanning speed switches each time the button is pressed. press SUBTITLE again or press /. Example: Playing specific titles. • Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input. • If the angles are not switched when ANGLE is pressed. then press CLEAR. Also refer to the operating instructions of the device used for recording. Switching the camera angles For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multiple angles are recorded. Current angle/Total number of recorded angles 04  To resume normal playback  Press  PLAY. Caution • The subtitles cannot be switched for discs recorded on a DVD or BD recorder. The speed steps depend on the disc or file (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). Note that DivX media files and external 25 En . • The current angle and total number of recorded angles are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display.  About displaying external subtitle files while playing DivX media files In addition to the subtitles recorded in DivX media files. Press twice to skip back to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/track/file. Normal playback resumes when the button is released. switch them from the menu screen. • If the subtitles are not switched when SUBTITLE is pressed. press / or /. • The speed switches each time the button is pressed (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). Example: Subtitle  To resume normal playback  Press  PLAY.  During playback. press  or . press and hold / or /.  To resume normal playback  Press  PLAY. • Forward or reverse scanning is also possible by holding the button down. To switch the subtitle. the subtitles can be switched during playback. • When  PREV is pressed. the angles can be switched during playback. press ANGLE.Forward and reverse scanning  During playback. chapter or track you want to play. switch them from the menu screen. the file is treated as an external subtitle file. • The picture moves a step forward or reverse each time the button is pressed. Current subtitle/Total number of recorded subtitles Skipping content  Press  PREV or  NEXT.  1/2 English  • The subtitles can also be switched by selecting Subtitle from the TOOLS menu. then press ENTER. • Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number. Angle 1/4 • The angles can also be switched by selecting Angle from the TOOLS menu. this player also supports the display of external subtitle files. press ANGLE again or press / .  Turning the subtitles off  Press SUBTITLE. Step forward and step reverse  While playback is paused.  During playback. chapters or tracks  Input the number of the title. press SUBTITLE. The speed steps depend on the disc or file. • When  NEXT is pressed. To switch the angles. • The current subtitle and total number of recorded subtitles are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. Playing in slow motion  While playback is paused. Switching the subtitles For discs or files on which multiple subtitles are recorded. the playback skips back to the beginning of the currently playing title/chapter/ track/file. If a file has the same name as a DivX media file aside from the file extension and the extension is one of the extensions listed below. the playback skips ahead to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/ file.

German(de/deu). Current secondary video/Total number of recorded secondary video streams Example: Secondary Video 1/4 • The secondary video can also be switched by selecting Secondary Video from the TOOLS menu. To switch the secondary video. Spanish(es/spa). . press SECONDARY AUDIO. press SECONDARY VIDEO again or press /. Finnish(fi/fin). Bulgarian(bg/bul).1ch L C R Ls Rs Lb Rb LFE Number of channels Channels recorded on disc 26 En • The audio/secondary audio can also be switched by selecting Audio or Secondary Audio from the TOOLS menu. Icelandic(is/isl). etc. Turkish(tr/tur) • If the audio/secondary audio is not switched when AUDIO/SECONDARY AUDIO is pressed. Czech(cs/ces).  During playback.04 subtitle files must be located in the same folder. If no language code is specified. • If the secondary video is not switched when SECONDARY VIDEO is pressed. switch it from the menu screen.txt. Norwegian(no/ nor). Croatian(hr/hrv). the subtitles are displayed with the font corresponding to the language code set at Subtitle Language (page 39). Macedonian(mk/ mkd). . The disc information appears on the TV screen. Serbian(sr/ srp). Slovenian(sl/slv) Group 3 Belarusian(be/bel).  Turning the Secondary Audio off  Press SECONDARY AUDIO.ass If the language code is specified for the external subtitle file. English(en/eng). Dutch(nl/nld). Kurdish(ku/kur). Italian(it/ita). . Faroese(fo/fao). Romanian(ro/ron). Swedish(sv/swe).  During playback. Hungarian(hu/hun). Switching the secondary video Use the procedure below to switch the secondary video (Picture-in-Picture) recorded on the BD-ROM. Swahili(sw/swa).  Turning the Secondary Video off  Press SECONDARY VIDEO. to delete any external subtitle files you do not want to display from the disc. then press CLEAR. then press CLEAR. The information switches each time the button is pressed. Slovak(sk/slk). press AUDIO again or press / . audio streams/channels can be switched during playback. Russian(ru/rus). press AUDIO. The same font is used for the all the languages in each of the groups below. • The current secondary video and total number of recorded secondary video streams are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. Danish(da/dan). Guarani(gn/grn). .ssa. Basque(eu/eus). • To switch the secondary audio. Polish(pl/pol). Only one external subtitle file can be displayed on this player. Use a computer. Scots-Gaelic(gd/gla). the subtitles are displayed with the font corresponding to that language code. press SECONDARY VIDEO. Galician(gl/ glg). Catalan(ca/cat).. Switching the audio and secondary audio For discs or files on which multiple audio streams/ channels are recorded. Rhaeto-Romance(rm/roh).smi. Moldavian(mo/mol). Audio Dolby True HD Audio type 2/2 English 96kHz 7. To switch the audio. Ukrainian(uk/ukr) Group 4 Greek(el/ell) Group 5 Estonian(et/est). Portuguese(pt/por). The information display differs during playback and when playback is stopped. Example: Current audio/Total number of recorded audio streams Displaying the disc information  Press DISPLAY. Irish(ga/gle). Also use this procedure to switch the secondary audio for BD-ROMs on which secondary audio is recorded.sub. Zulu(zu/zul) Group 2 Albanian(sq/sqi). the external subtitles may not be displayed properly. Group 1 Afrikaans(af/afr). Latin(la/lat). . • The current audio and total number of recorded audio streams are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. . .srt. switch it from the menu screen. Note • Depending on the file. French(fr/fra).

The types of recorded audio streams depend on the disc and file. without the current secondary video or the total number of secondary video streams recorded on the disc being displayed. • Secondary video mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary video is recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On (page 39). 2. chapters or tracks Skipping content Playing in slow motion2. 10. 12. some of the functions cannot be used. 27 En . 14. • The types of recorded subtitles depend on the disc and file. For some discs. Check the usable functions on the table below. Sound is produced during forward and reverse scanning. Reverse step playback is not possible. • In some cases the secondary audio may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately. Some functions may not work for some discs or files. 7. • No sound is output during slow motion playback. Some discs do not include secondary video. 9. 3. normal playback resumes automatically when the chapter switches. • It is not possible to switch the speed during reverse slow motion playback. without the current secondary audio or the total number of secondary audio streams recorded on the disc being displayed. Disc/file type Function1 BDROM 3        audio11 video13 12 14  BD-R /-RE 3           DVDVideo 3           DVD-R /-RW (VR format) 04 AVCHD Video file 3   6 7       Image file            Audio file 4           Audio CD 4           Forward and reverse scanning2 Playing specific titles. • In some cases the subtitle may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately. 13. Some discs do not include secondary audio. 6. even if indicated [] on the table. 11. 4. In some cases. Angle mark is displayed for scenes at which multiple angles are recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On (page 39).5 Step forward and step Switching the camera reverse2 angles8 3           3           Switching the subtitles9 Switching the audio10 Switching the secondary Switching the secondary Displaying the disc information 1. No sound is produced during forward and reverse scanning. • The types of recorded secondary audio streams depend on the disc and file. • In some cases the secondary video may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately. without the current subtitle or the total number of subtitles recorded on the disc being displayed.Playback functions The functions that can be used differ according to the type of disc and file. • Secondary audio mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary audio is recorded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On (page 39). 5. 8. Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the time. A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off 4 Starting playback from the specified time. press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen.  To cancel A-B Repeat play • Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen. input 0. 1 During playback. 4 Select the end point for A-B Repeat. CLEAR SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION 2 Select the type of search. then press ENTER.04 Using the Play Mode functions Playing a specific title. 2 Select A-B Repeat.  Closing the Play Mode screen Press PLAY MODE or HOME MENU. 2. then press ENTER. Use / to move the cursor. then press ENTER. Use / to select B (End). then press ENTER. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Title Search 0 3 2 Title Search Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 During playback. then press ENTER. • To play from 1 hour 20 minutes. press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. 0 and 0. then press ENTER. • Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input. then press ENTER. 1. • To search for title 32. Use / to select. then press ENTER. • Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input. chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. Use / to move the cursor. Time Search 1 2 : 4 5 : 0 0 Search 4 Starting playback from the specified title. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. then press ENTER. Use / to select Search. 0. Use / to select A (Start). Use / to select. press  STOP or CLEAR. 5. chapter or track. input 0. then press ENTER. See the table on page 30 for the search types. • During playback. Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this procedure to play a specific section within a title or track repeatedly. 28 En . input 0. then press ENTER. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. 0. 3 Input the time. 0 and 0. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. Use / to select. A-B Repeat playback starts. 2 Select Time Search. 3 Select the starting point for A-B Repeat. Use / to select Search. 4. 3 and 2. 3 Input the number. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. • To play from 45 minutes.

29 En . 1 During playback. Note • The type of repeat modes depends on the disc and file being played.  To cancel Random Play • Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen. – When you start other Repeat Play or Random Play. 2 Select Repeat/Random. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. Use / to select. – When you start Repeat Play. track or file repeatedly.Note • A-B Repeat play is canceled in the following cases: – When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVDVideo discs only). press  STOP or CLEAR. title. • During playback. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. • During playback. – When you start other Repeat Play or Random Play. then press ENTER. 2 Select Repeat/Random. 1 During playback. Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this procedure to play the tracks or files in random order. 3 Select the type of Repeat Play. See the table on page 30. – When you search outside the repeat range. Note • Random Play is canceled in the following cases: – When you use the search function. Use / to select. The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu. – When you search outside the repeat range. then press ENTER. 3 Select the Random Play.  To cancel Repeat Play • Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen. press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. Use / to select. chapter. then press ENTER. See the table on page 30 for the types of Repeat Play. Use / to select. press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. then press ENTER. • Repeat Play is canceled in the following cases: – When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVDVideo discs only). 04 Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) Use this procedure to play the currently playing disc. press  STOP or CLEAR.

4. 2. 30 En . Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Playing a title repeatedly (Title Repeat) Playing a chapter repeatedly (Chapter Repeat) Playing a track or file repeatedly (Track Repeat) Playing all the titles. Disc/file type Play Mode type Mark1 BDROM2 BD-R /-RE DVDVideo2 DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Video file Image file Audio file Audio CD Repeat Play Random Play Search 1. tracks or files on the disc repeatedly (All Repeat) Playing the tracks or files in random order (Random Track/File)                    3          4     4     5     6          Playing from a specific time (Time Search) Playing a specific title (Title Search) Playing a specific chapter (Chapter Search) Playing a specific track (Track Search) — — — —                                     The type of Play Mode is indicated by the mark. the playlist titles cannot be played repeatedly. some of the functions cannot be used with some titles. For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs. The original titles are played repeatedly. 3. In some cases. However. The files in the folder or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly. Check the usable functions on the table below. 6. some of the functions cannot be used. The files in the folder are played repeatedly. 5. The tracks in the disc or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly.04 About Play Mode types The functions that can be used differ according to the type of disc and file.

then press ENTER. image or audio files. Note • It may take a few seconds before playback starts. BD-R BDAV My Favorite TV Program 1 Morning serial drama 2 News at noon 3 Evening movie 4 Midnight variety show 5 Playback protection 6 World heritage 7 Drama: Blank time 8 Music and us 10 items Playing image files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. • The number of views may be restricted (page 9). Use / to select Movies. are recorded TV CONTROL INPUT SELECT Note • When playing an audio CD (CD-DA or DTS-CD). Use / to select. Use / to select. 3 Select Movies. 31 En . Use / to select. input the password set for the disc. 2 Select the disc. PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. then press ENTER. proceed to step 6. then press ENTER. 2 Select the disc. CH VOL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER HOME MENU RETURN PLAY • Folders – The files in the selected folder are displayed. etc. 04 Playing video files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. 3 Select the title or track to be played. • BD-R/-RE discs • DVD-R/-RW (VR format) discs • Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) • DVDs/CDs on which only data files of video. 5 Select the folder containing the file you want to play. Use / to select. the Now Playing screen is displayed.  Closing the Home Media Gallery Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY or HOME MENU. and continues until the end of the list is reached. • It may not be possible to play some files properly. The discs that can be played from the Home Media Gallery are as shown below (see also page 7). then press ENTER. • Some BD-R/-RE discs have playback protection. • All Movies – All the recorded files are displayed. Use / to select. then press ENTER. To cancel the protection. This is normal. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu then pressing ENTER. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER. 2 Select the disc. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is displayed. tracks or files recorded on the disc. Playback starts. Use / to select. If you have selected All Movies. Use / to play the previous or next file. Use / to select. then press ENTER. Playback starts from the selected file. • To play DVD-R/-RW (VR format) playlists. then press ENTER. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu then pressing ENTER. switch to the playlist using the Original/Play List command on the TOOLS menu (page 20). then press ENTER. 4 Select Folders or All Movies.Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Gallery lets you display a list of the titles.

Playback starts from the selected file. Use / to select Music. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu then pressing ENTER. Use / to select Photos. Use / to select. My Folder DVD-RW/Photos/Folders If you have selected All Songs. The Now Playing screen (shown below) is displayed. 5 Select the folder containing the file you want to play. then press ENTER. Use /// to select. 4 Select Folders or All Photos. • All Songs – All the recorded files are displayed. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. 3 Select Music.05. Use / to select. Use / to select. Use / to select. ). Use / to select. A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is displayed. then press ENTER. then press ENTER.  About Slideshow A display of the files on the disc or in the folder that switches automatically.02. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu pressing ENTER. • All Photos – All the recorded files are displayed. Playing audio files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. then press ENTER.34 Elapsed time Total file playing time 99 items Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add tracks and files to the HMG (Home Media Gallery) Playlist are as shown below. • Folders – The files in the selected folder are displayed. Use /// to select. Use / to display the previous or next file. • Folders – The files in the selected folder are displayed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play.  Rotating images  Press ANGLE while playing a slideshow. Use / to play the previous or next file. proceed to step 6. Use / to select. If you have selected All Photos. Use / to select. 4 Select Folders or All Songs. • The image rotates each time the button is pressed (90°  180°  270°  0°  . and continues until the end of the list is reached. then press ENTER. and continues until the end of the list is reached. then press ENTER. then press ENTER.04 3 Select Photos. 2 Select the disc. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The image can also be rotated by selecting Rotate from the TOOLS menu. proceed to step 6. 32 En .mp3 Play 0. Load the disc beforehand. A list of the files and folders in the selected folder is displayed. then press ENTER. Currently playing file Music 001. 4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 2 Select the disc. and create the HMG Playlist.  Adding tracks/files Use this procedure to add tracks and files. • Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) • DVDs/CDs on which audio files are recorded A slideshow starts from the selected file..33 DATA DISC 0. 5 Select the folder containing the file you want to play. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. 3 Select the track/file to be added..

2 Select HMG Playlist. Use / to select.mp3 Play 0.34 HMG Elapsed time Total track/file playing time 33 En . 04 The track or file selected in step 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. Playback starts from the selected track/file.mp3 Music003.  Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery.mp3 BD PLAYER TOOLS Music007. Note • A maximum of 24 tracks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist.mp3 Music002. then press ENTER.02. press to display the TOOLS menu. 3 Select the track/file to be played. The Now Playing screen (shown below) is displayed. then press ENTER.33 DATA DISC 0. repeat steps 3 to 5. then press ENTER. Currently playing track/file Music 001. 2 Use / to select Delete from HMG Playlist. Use / to select.mp3 Music005.mp3Add to HMG Playlist Now Playing 15Items  Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist 1 Select the track/file to be deleted. then press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. then press ENTER.  To add the currently playing track/ file to the HMG Playlist 1 While the track/file is playing. then press ENTER. and continues until the end of the list is reached. The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home Media Gallery from the Home Menu pressing ENTER. TOOLS 2 Use / to select Add to HMG Playlist. • The HMG Playlist is cleared in the following cases: – When the power is turned off.mp3Play from Beginning Music008.mp3 Music006. To add more tracks or files.5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. – When the disc tray is opened. Use /  to play the previous or next track/file. Use / to select.05. Folders CD-ROM/Music Music001.mp3 Music004.

2 or 3 is selected below. 34 En A detailed settings screen appears. the adjustments can be made viewing the picture. Normally set it to Auto1. switch this to Auto 2. If the black is too dense and all the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black due to the combination with the connected TV. Note • Prog. • Pure Cinema – This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. then press ENTER. Video Adjust [ Memory1 ] Prog. • Detail – Adjusts the picture’s contours. • PDP – Select this when connected to a plasma TV of another brand. When / are pressed. Video Adjust PDP Adjustments • Prog. • MNR – Reduces the mosquito noise (distortion along the contours of the picture generated upon MPEG compression). TOP MENU TOOLS 2 Select the item to be adjusted. • Chroma Level – Adjusts the density of the colors. • Hue – Adjusts the balance between green and red.  When Memory1. 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. • Pioneer LCD – Select this when connected to a Pioneer liquid crystal display TV. The Video Adjust screen can also be displayed by selecting Video Adjust from the TOOLS menu. . Motion Motion Still 1 During playback. • Pioneer PDP – Select this when connected to a Pioneer plasma TV. • Professional – With this setting. The detailed settings screen reappears when ENTER is pressed.05 Chapter 5 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the playback picture can be adjusted according to the TV you are using. If the picture seems unnatural. • BNR – Reduces the block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression). • YNR – Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal. For a description of the parameters. select 7. • Pioneer Projector – Select this when connected to a Pioneer front projector. Select this when connected to a professional monitor. • Black Level – Adjusts the level of the black portions. On or Off (page 35).Motion – Adjust according to the type of image (moving or still image). • White Level – Adjusts the level of the white portions.5 IRE. This is effective mainly when outputting video materials as progressive images. Select using / according to the TV being used. • Memory1 to 3 – Picture quality settings with adjusted parameters can be stored in the memory. 2 Select a preset. • Projector – Select this when connected to a front projector of another brand. • Black Setup – Select the black level as the setup level.Motion and Pure Cinema have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (576i/480i or 1080i signals). press VIDEO ADJUST to display the Video Adjust screen. see When Memory1. • Gamma Correction – Adjusts how the dark portions of the picture look. video signal processing is restrained. Use / to select. Normally select 0 IRE. • LCD – Select this when connected to a liquid crystal display of another brand. Prog. Motion Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR Off Off Off Off Soft Min Auto1 Max Max Max Max Fine Max Still ENTER BNR RETURN HOME MENU MNR Detail White Level PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW VIDEO ADJUST 3 Adjust the picture quality. • CNR – Reduces noise in the chroma (C) signal. Use  to select Adjustments.

 Closing the Audio DRC screen Press ENTER or HOME MENU. proceed to step 5.Motion is disabled when Pure Cinema is set to On. • YNR. Use / to select. Use / to select. Press Adjusting the audio TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. depending on the content. the setting has the same effect as Off. Adjust the setting for example when viewing movies late at night and the dialogs are difficult to hear. • The effect may be weak for some discs. 35 En . • Black Setup has the effect only for pictures output from the VIDEO output terminals. BNR and MNR have no effect on 1080/24p video signals output from the HDMI OUT terminal. High and Auto. Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) Adjust the audio delay for the selected video output terminal if the video and audio are not synchronized. Note • This only affects the Dolby TrueHD. • The sound may be interrupted while setting the delay. Use / to select. 4 Select Auto or Manual. Use / to select. – Linear PCM audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal or HDMI OUT terminal.  Closing the Lip Sync screen Press ENTER or HOME MENU. • Auto – The player automatically adjusts the timing of the video and audio when connected to a device equipped with the HDMI Auto Lipsync Correction feature using an HDMI cable. The audio delay can be adjusted from 0 to 250 ms in steps of 5 ms. HOME MENU RETURN Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) has the effect of playing loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. 3 Select and set Audio DRC. For Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital. is displayed on the disc information screen when playing the “film material” pictures of BD-ROM. the setting has the same effect as High or Off for Dolby TrueHD signals. 5 Adjusting the amount of audio delay. display the TOOLS menu. • When Auto is selected. 1 During playback. Note • The Lip Sync adjustment is only applicable to the output terminal set at Output Terminal (page 43). Medium. Press .• Prog. then press ENTER. 05  Closing the Video Adjust screen Press HOME MENU. Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital audio signals of BDs. then press ENTER. Low.  About Pure Cinema There are two types of video signals: • Video material – Video signals recorded at 25 or 30 frames/second • Film material – Video signals recorded at 24 frames/ second “Pure Cinema” uses signal processing suited for “film material” when converting 576i/480i or 1080i interlaced video signals into progressive video signals. and for NTSC signals output. • Manual – Adjust manually while viewing the video. resulting in clear picture reproduction without losing the quality of the material. 1 During playback. then press ENTER. display the TOOLS menu. • Audio DRC affects the audio signals output from the following audio output terminals: – Analog audio signals output from the AUDIO OUT terminals. BD-R/-RE and DVD-Video discs (page 26). Use / to switch between Off. then press ENTER. 4 Adjust the setting. DVDs and video files. TOOLS. TOOLS. If you have selected Manual. CNR. Lip Sync Manual 100 ms 0 50 100 150 200 250 Press 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. 3 Select and set Lip Sync. Use / to select. then use / to adjust.

Use /// to select. models): Initial Setup BD PLAYER Video Out Audio Out HDMI Network Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator TV Aspect Ratio 4:3 Video Out DVD 16:9 Video Out NTSC on PAL TV 16:9 (Widescreen) Full Letter Box On  Closing the Initial Setup screen Press HOME MENU. then press ENTER. display the Home Menu screen. 2 Select and set Initial Setup. 3 Select the item and change the setting. 36 En . then press ENTER. Example (U. Press HOME MENU.K. Use / to select.06 Chapter 6 Advanced settings Changing the settings CLEAR SECONDARY AUDIO VIDEO ENTER OUTPUT RESOLUTION VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISPLAY POPUP MENU MENU TOP MENU TOOLS ENTER HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playback is stopped.

• DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when playing 16:9 pictures of DVD-Video or DVD-R/-RW (VR format) discs. the factory default settings are indicated in bold. 4:3 pictures are displayed over the entire screen. The DTS Digital Surround audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output. with the left and right sides of the 16:9 picture cropped. Setting Video Out Audio Out TV Aspect Ratio Options 16:9 (Widescreen) 4:3 (Standard) 4:3 Video Out Full Normal Explanation Select this when connected to a wide (16:9) TV. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are converted into 2-channel signals compatible with Dolby Surround for output (when the connected AV receiver or amplifier. Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier.Note • Items that cannot be changed are indicated in gray. 4:3 pictures are displayed with vertical black bars along the sides. Off Select this when connected to an NTSC-compatible TV. the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals. in which case this can be set to Off. • Many recent PAL TVs support the input of NTSC signals. DTS-HD Master Audio signals. The AAC audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs. 06 4:3 Video Out is only valid when TV Aspect Ratio is set to16:9 (Widescreen). the picture will be displayed in the Letter Box mode even if Pan & Scan is set. DTS-HD Master Audio signals. is compatible with AAC audio signals. Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier. DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output.. With BD-ROMs. • In Options. the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output. DTS 2 DTS  PCM Dolby Digital audio signals are output. Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier. etc. The Dolby Digital audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output. Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier. Select this when you cannot switch the aspect ratio to 4:3 on the TV. the AV receiver or amplifier outputs the linear PCM audio signals as surround audio signals). is compatible with Dolby Pro Logic. they are output in the Letter Box mode. is not compatible with DTS Digital Surround audio signals. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digital  PCM DTS Out DTS 1 * Only valid for the DIGITAL OUT terminal. AAC Out AAC * Only valid for the DIGITAL OUT terminal. • The factory default setting is On for U. The AAC audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output. is not compatible with Dolby Digital audio signals. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are converted into 2-channel (stereo) signals for output. With BD-ROMs. Select this when connected to a conventional TV.. DVD 16:9 Video Out Letter Box Pan & Scan 16:9 pictures are displayed with black bars at the top and bottom when viewing on a 4:3 screen. Also check your TV’s operating instructions. • DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard). Dolby Digital audio signals are output. is not compatible with AAC audio signals. With BD-ROMs. DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output. Select this to view 4:3 pictures over the entire screen. etc. etc.K. AAC  PCM DTS Downmix Stereo Lt/Rt 37 En . When other 16:9 pictures are played. etc. For some discs. NTSC on PAL TV On Select this when connected to a PAL-only TV. models. Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital 1 * Only valid for the DIGITAL OUT terminal. The items that can be selected depend on the player’s status. etc. the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output... The picture is displayed correctly on the PAL-only TV even when playing a source with a frame/field rate other than 50 Hz.. Off for other models. the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals. The picture is displayed over the entire screen.

Select this when connected with a Standard HDMI™ cable (page 13). Select this to control the player with the remote control of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. Select this when you do not want to control the player with the remote control of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. they are output as such (page 45). Select this when you do not want to output the audio from the HDMI output terminal. Select this to test the network connection (page 42). the optimum video signals for your TV are output. Select this to display a list of the network settings (page 41). Also refer to About KURO LINK function on page 14. Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:4:4 signals. IP Address Proxy Server Display Network Configuration Connection Test On Off On Off Auto Off Select this to set the IP address of the player and DNS server (page 41). HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals are output with as many audio channels as possible. Select this when you want the TV to turn on each time playback is started or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed on the player. Only set the proxy server if so instructed by your Internet service provider (page 41). Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:2:2 signals. The player’s setting screen is closed if the output video resolution is switched by changing the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting.06 HDMI Network Setting HDMI High Speed Transmission Options On Off Explanation Select this when connected with a High Speed HDMI™ cable (page 13). Choose this if the colors seem too faint and the black seems too bright when RGB (16 to 235) is selected. Select this when you want the secondary audio and interactive audio signals to be mixed for output or when you want to output prioritizing sampling frequency over the number of channels (page 45). Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Select this when you do not want the player’s power to turn off together with the TV’s power. RGB (0 to 255) Normally it is recommended to set this to Auto. 38 En . Display Power Off * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On. PCM Off KURO LINK On Off Display Power On * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On. Enables PQLS function (page 14). Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Select this when you want the player’s power to turn off together with the TV’s power. In cases when the number of channels does not decrease when the signals are output as such without converting them to linear PCM. Select this when you do not want the TV to turn on each time playback is started or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed on the player. HDMI Color Space Auto YCbCr 4:4:4 YCbCr 4:2:2 RGB (16 to 235) Select this to automatically switch the video output between YCbCr and RGB signals according to the connected equipment. Disables PQLS function (page 14). Choose this if the colors seem too dense and all the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black when RGB (0 to 255) is selected. When set to Auto. PQLS * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On.

06 Audio Language English * For some discs. Other Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority BDMV BDAV Select this to play the BDMV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV formats. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see on page 47 for the code table). Select this to play the BDAV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV formats. the BD layer is played. The BD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD or CD) is played. Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting. one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.Setting Language Playback OSD Language Options English available languages Explanation Select this to set the language of the on-screen displays to English. it may not be possible to change to the available languages selected language. Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV screen. one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Select this if you do not want to display the angle mark. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see on page 47 for the code table). This makes pictures clear when playback is paused. Subtitle Display On Off Still Picture Field Frame Auto Angle/Secondary Indicator On Off DivX VOD Hybrid Disc Playback Registration Code BD DVD CD Select this to display the subtitles. Displays the player’s registration code required to play DivX VOD files (page 9). If there is no DVD layer. Field or Frame is switched automatically according to the disc or file being played. one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Choose a language for the on-screen displays from the listed languages. This eliminates instability of the picture when playback is paused. Continue to the next screen to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback. Note that on some discs the subtitles are displayed by force. Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Video default audio language to English. Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback. it may not available languages be possible to change to the selected language. Other Select this to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback to English. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see on page 47 for the code table). Language * For some discs. If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set. BDMV/DVD-Video Menu w/Subtitle Lang. The CD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and CD) is played. Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default audio language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback. secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV screen (pages 25 and 26). the BD layer is played. Continue to the next screen to set the default menu language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Select this if you do not want to display the subtitles. 39 En . Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting. but instability may be observed. If there is no CD layer. The DVD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD) is played. it may not be possible to change to the available languages selected language. If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set. Subtitle Language English * For some discs. Other If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set. Select this to display the angle mark. Continue to the next screen to set the default audio language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback.

Application Data Erase Use this to erase bookmarks. Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting. etc. high scores of games and other data (page 42). On Off Screen Saver On Select this to display the operation indicators (Play. Set the terminals from which the player’s video and audio signals are to be output (page 43). The screen saver turns off when an operation is performed on the player or remote control. 40 En . see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on page 18. Change the restricted age (page 43).) on the TV screen. even while the audio CD or audio file is playing. For details. Stop. Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting. Storage Format Select this to format the storage device on which the data used by the BD-LIVE and BONUSVIEW functions is stored (page 42).) on the TV screen. Register (change) the password for parental lock settings or for unlocking to play DVD-Video with parental lock feature (page 43). The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1 minute after playback is stopped or paused. Change the Country/Area code (page 43). With audio CDs and audio files. Select this if you do not want to display the operation indicators (Play.06 Data Management Parental Lock Options Setting Individual/Shared Data Erase Options Explanation Use this to display the list of data used for the BD-LIVE and BONUSVIEW functions and to erase the data (page 42). Remove the disc from the disc tray when changing the setting. The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1 minute after the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed while playing a BD or DVD. Select this to turn the power off automatically (the power turns off automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes). Off Auto Power Off On Off Software Update The Software Update function can check for and download updated system software from the network server (page 44). etc. Change the player’s parental lock level (page 43). the screen saver is automatically activated if no button is operated for over 1 minute. Setup Navigator Set Password (Change Password) DVD-Video Parental Lock BDMV Parental Lock Country Code Output Terminal On Screen Display Start making the settings using the Setup Navigator menu. Select this if you do not want the power to turn off automatically. Stop. The screen saver is not activated.

Use / to move the cursor. The characters that can be input for the server name are listed on the table below. Input Port Number. Setting the IP address 1 Select and set Network  IP Address  Next Screen. Off – The player’s IP address must be set manually. then press ENTER. Use / to change. 41 En . refer to the network device’s operating instructions. Key Characters 1. Use / to select. Use / to select. • Auto Set IP Address On – The player’s IP address is obtained automatically. • IP Address – Input the IP address. Off – The DNS server’s IP address must be set manually. use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number. press  after inputting the first character then input the second character. • If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R). Select this when using a broadband router or broadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. then press ENTER. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the DNS server’s IP address stipulated by your Internet service provider. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number if you select IP address by step 3. Network BD PLAYER IP Address Auto Set IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway 2 Select and set Use or Not use at Proxy Server.– abc2 def3 ghi4 jkl5 Key Characters mno6 pqrs7 tuv8 wxyz9 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 0  Setting the proxy server Only set the proxy server if so instructed by your Internet service provider. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input characters if you select Server Name by step 3. Use / to change. • You may need to contact your Internet service provider or network administrator when inputting the IP address manually. Press ENTER to set. • Use / to move the displayed characters when all the input characters cannot be displayed. Auto Set DNS Server Address is also set to Off. • For information on DHCP server function. subnet mask and default gateway. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the IP address. Use / to select. then press . Use /// to set the IP address of the player or DNS server. Note • When Auto Set IP Address is set to Off. then press . 4 Input IP Address or Server Name. Network BD PLAYER Proxy Server Proxy Server Server Select Method Server Name Port Number Use Server Name  06 Off  • Use – Select this when using a proxy server. 3 Select and set Server Select Method. 2 Set IP address. Off Auto Set DNS Server Address DNS Server (Primary) DNS Server (Secondary) • Not use – Select this when not using a proxy server. 6  Displaying the network settings  Select and set Network  Display Network Configuration  Next Screen. then press ENTER. • Server Name – Input the server name. proceed to step 3. • Auto Set DNS Server Address On – The DNS server’s IP address is obtained automatically. Press . If you have selected Use. then press ENTER. 1 Select and set Network  Proxy Server  Next Screen. This player’s IP address will automatically be allocated from the DHCP server. • Use CLEAR to delete the last character.

• Individual/Shared Data Erase Use this procedure to select and erase data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW function (page 8). default gateway and DNS server (primary and secondary) settings are displayed. Select Next Screen. Use / to select. all the data on the external storage device is erased. Use / to change. When Shared Data is selected. Use / to select.0” is displayed when each IP address has not been set. use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. 2 Select and set Audio Language. The list screen appears. Caution • Some time is required to erase the data. 1 Select and set Data Management. then press ENTER. bookmarks data. 42 En . check the connections and/or settings (pages 17 and 41). When Auto Set IP Address is set to On. • Storage Format Use this procedure to format the storage in which the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW function is stored (page 8). • Do not unplug the power cord while data is being erased. one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played. Note • If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. 4 Change the language. Select Start. Use / to select.” is displayed once the test is completed. Note • “0. 3 Select Yes. • Application Data Erase Use this procedure to erase BD-ROM application data (high scores of games.06 The MAC address.  Changing to other language at language setting 1 Select and set Language. the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW is erased. all the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and not associated to discs is erased. 2 Select and set the erase menu. Refer to Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table on page 47. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. Use / to select.). then press ENTER. Individual/Shared Data Erase BD PLAYER Shared Data Disc Name 1 Disc Name 2 Disc Name 3 Disc Name 4 Disc Name 5 Disc Name 6 Disc Name 7 15 items  Testing the network connection  Select and set Network  Connection Test  Start. then press ENTER. When this is done. “Network connection test completed successfully. • The language can also be changed using the number buttons. then press ENTER.  Erasing data that has been added to BDs and application data Use this procedure to erase data that has been added to BDs (data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW function) and application data. then press ENTER. then press ENTER. Select Start. Use / to move the cursor to Number. subnet mask. etc. Use / to select. • This operation does not work when a disc is loaded.0. Use / to select.0. 3 Select and set Other. If any other message is displayed. Use / to select the data to be erased. then press ENTER. Subtitle Language or BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. IP address. Use / to select. Initial Setup BD PLAYER Audio Language Video Out Audio Out Language English HDMI Network 0 5 1 4 Number Language Playback Data Management Setup Navigator When a disc name is selected. the values obtained automatically are displayed.

then press ENTER to set. then press ENTER to set. no sound is output from the HDMI OUT terminal (a warning message is displayed). then press ENTER. refer to step 4 on page 18. then input the new password. Use / to move the cursor.  Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs For BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. then press ENTER. have Parental Lock levels (check the indications on the disc’s jacket or elsewhere). For details on the settings. for example. 06  Changing the Country/Area code 1 Select and set Parental Lock  Country Code  Next Screen. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number.  Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence. • To change the password. then press ENTER. Use / to select. 1 Select and set Parental Lock  Set Password  Next Screen. Select the actually connected video and audio output terminals. set the player’s level to the level lower than the discs. 1 Select and set Parental Lock  BDMV Parental Lock  Next Screen. then press ENTER. use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. 1 Select and set Parental Lock  DVD-Video Parental Lock  Next Screen. viewing is not restricted. 2 Input the password. 43 En . 3 Change the level. then press ENTER. for example. 2 Select and set the video and audio output terminals. Use / to move the cursor. then press ENTER to set. Use / to select. Registering or Changing the password Use this procedure to register or change the code number required for the Parental Lock settings. • If you forget the password. Use / to move the cursor. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. Note • We recommend making a note of the password. Use / to select. Note • When Age Restriction is set to 255. Use / to move the cursor to Number. Use / to select. Use / to move the cursor. Use / to move the cursor. Use /// to select. then press ENTER to set. then press ENTER. 3 Change the age. 2 Input the password. 2 Input the password.  Setting the output terminals Set the terminals from which the player’s video and audio signals are to be output. When set to Off. reset the player to the factory default setting. 2 Input the password. input the previously registered password. viewing is not restricted. Use / to select. then register the password again (page 44). then press ENTER to set. When COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO is selected for Video. Refer to Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table on page 47. then press ENTER to set. Note • The level can be set to Off or between Level1 and Level8. viewing can be restricted by setting an age restriction for the BD-ROMs. then press ENTER to set. • The the country/area code can also be changed using the number buttons. then press ENTER. then press ENTER to set. 3 Re-input the password. Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or / to input the number. Use / to change. 1 Select and set Options  Output Terminal  Next Screen. Use / to change. Use / to move the cursor. 3 Change the country/area code. To restrict viewing these discs.

then press ENTER. 2 When a disc is playing. 6 Updating starts.06 Software updating The software of the player can be updated by connecting it to the Internet using a LAN cable. downloading may take a long time. use Setup Navigator to reset the player (page 18). • If the player is already running the latest software. Press HOME MENU.. bookmarks. all the data for the secondary video (Picturein-Picture). The front panel display shows “DOWNLOAD OK” and the player turns off automatically. • Software updating may take a certain period of time. display the Home Menu screen. do not unplug the power cord until the FL OFF indicator turns off. • When all the settings are restored to the factory defaults. 5 Downloading of the software start. 7 Updating completes. is erased. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the player’s power is turned on. • Steps 5 to 7 are the operations performed (automatically) by the player (they are intended to update the software). Both processes may take a certain period of time. Note • After restoring all the settings to the factory default settings. Caution • Do not unplug the power cord during software updating. Before updating the software. Operate using the buttons on the player’s front panel. 3 Select and set Options  Software Update  Start. 44 En . Use / to select Yes.” is displayed. Use / to select. 2 Select and set Initial Setup. • The help menu is displayed if the player cannot connect to the Internet. • When the front panel display is off. “WRT SYS1”. turn it on with FL DIMMER. downloading and updating. The software download status is displayed on the screen. Check the connections and settings (pages 17 and 41). 3 While pressing . • Depending on the Internet connection conditions. • Other operations are defeated during software updating. Eject the disc from the player. then press ENTER. 1 When playback is stopped. • There are two processes for software updating. make sure that you have connected the player to the network and made the necessary settings (pages 17 and 41). Furthermore updating process cannot be canceled. press  STANDBY/ON. the updating will be aborted and malfunction may occur with the player. The front panel display shows messages such as “DATA CHECK”. press  to stop playback. then press ENTER. secondary audio. • Depending on the Internet connection conditions. 4 Select and set Yes. Use / to select. Otherwise. the message “The player’s software is up to date and does not need updating. etc. Note • Steps 1 to 4 are the operations performed by the user (they are intended to download the software from the Internet). software downloading may take a certain period of time. When updating the player’s software with the front panel display off. “WRT DRV” and “WRT FLC”.

• The output from all terminals other than the ones selected for Audio does not sound as intended by the content provider. the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels).1-channel audio DTS Digital Surround9 5. 4. DTS Out is set to DTS  PCM. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p. • When HDMI or DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal. 45 En . depending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 13).10 Dolby Digital4 7. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital  PCM. the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed for output. Dolby Digital.9 DTS-HD Master Audio5. 8. or AAC Out is set to AAC  PCM (page 37). depending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 13). 5. 6. the signals are output in linear PCM (2 channels). 2. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1/Dolby Digital 2.6.1-channel audio Dolby Digital6 MPEG-2 AAC Dolby Digital6 5.6 Dolby Digital Plus5. Audio format BDROM Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS Digital Surround DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master Audio Linear PCM BD-R/ -RE Dolby Digital MPEG-2 AAC MPEG Linear PCM DVDVideo Dolby Digital DTS Digital Surround MPEG Linear PCM DVD-R/ Dolby Digital -RW (VR MPEG format) Linear PCM 1. When outputting the bitstream of Dolby TrueHD. the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels) or Dolby Digital bitstream. DTS Out is set to DTS 1/DTS 2 or AAC Out is set to AAC (page 37).7.9 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio5.1-channel audio7 7.1-channel audio7 Converted to 2channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio Dolby Digital MPEG-2 AAC 2-channel audio Dolby Digital Converted to 2-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio DTS Digital Surround 2-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio Dolby Digital 2-channel audio 7. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream. no audio signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal or DIGITAL OUT terminal (pages 18 and 43). When outputting Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream with settings of Dolby Digital 2 at Dolby Digital Out.1-channel audio Auto3 Dolby Digital5. the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed for output.1 channels) or Dolby Digital bitstream.6 Dolby TrueHD5. DTS 2 at DTS Out. the signals are output in linear PCM (7.1-channel audio 7. Caution • When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal.9. 3. Check on the table below. DTS-HD Master Audio. linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output from all terminals other than the ones selected at Output Terminal (pages 18 and 43). When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM or Auto (page 38).1-channel audio7 5. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p.1-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio Converted to 2-channel audio DTS Digital Surround4 7. Dolby Digital Plus.8 DTS Digital Surround5. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstream.About the audio output settings The audio signals that are output differ according to the audio format recorded on the disc and the player’s settings.1-channel audio Dolby Digital6 7. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surround. 06 AUDIO OUT terminals DIGITAL OUT terminal Converted to Not converted to linear PCM audio1 linear PCM audio2 HDMI OUT terminal PCM3 5.

• The audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal have a sampling frequency of 48 kHz (44.1 channels. 46 En . In other cases. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p.1 kHz for audio CDs). the signals may be output in linear PCM (2 channels) or DTS Digital Surround. output as audio signals of 5.1-channels or less. the signals are output in linear PCM (2 channels). 6. if the number of compatible channels of the connected HDMI device is lower. the signals are output with the number of channels for which the device is compatible. depending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device.06 9. the signals are output in linear PCM (2 channels) or DTS Digital Surround bitstream.1-channel surround back.1-channel surround back is output in 7. 10. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio. Note • Only compatible with 7. • When outputting linear PCM audio signals. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with DTS Digital Surround bitstream.

tr/tur. so/som. 2019 Tswana. bg/bul. si/sin. 1815 Russian Federation. 1324 Moldova. 1016 Kazakhstan. eo/epo. 1126 Korea. 1612 Portuguese. bo/bod. 2020 Telugu. co. ab/abk. 2209 Volapük. 1111 Kinyarwanda. 1304 Monaco. in/ind. bm. tw/twi. pt/por. 2018 Twi. 1009 Yoruba. lu. 1909 Spain. 1303 Montserrat. 1125 Chile. ss/ssw. ee. 1518 Oromo. hr. fa/fas.Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table  Language Code Table Language name. ms. 0610 Faroese. dm. az/aze. 0208 Bislama. hk. tl/tgl. 0209 Breton. 1222 Lingala. ta/tam. 0625 Wolof. 1612 Portugal. 0914 Interlingua. 0401 Dutch. 0618 Galician. 2008 Trinidad and Tobago. 0126 Bahamas. cl. 1608 Poland. rm/roh. 1620 Pushto. en/eng. 1908 Shona. 1513 Panjabi. 1618 Romania. 1222 Liechtenstein. ua. 1319 Netherlands. 1118 Kyrgyzstan. to/ton. 0615 French. bh/bih. 0512 Guarani. kz. br/bre. 1318 Mongolian. 2007 Tamil. 1203 Saint Vincent and the Grenadines. 0601 Polish. by. cn. kl/kal. 2015 Tsonga. 0712 Georgian. sg/sag. 0214 Bihari. ch. 1201 Latvian. gl. 0113 Australia. qu/que. 1503 Oriya. 2023 Tajikistan. 0520 Finnish. eu/eus. bg. mk/mkd. 2126 Venezuela. 0315 Croatian. ky/kir. 0405 Greece. tn/tsn. 1415 Pakistan. 0205 Belize. tm. 0809 Hungarian. tc. tt/tat. md. rw/kin. tg/tgk. se. ca/cat. 2012 Tajik. sm. sw/swa. bn/ben. us. uy. co/cos. 2005 Thai. pl/pol. 0701 Italian. sk/slk. nz. hy/hye. lv/lav. ka/kat. 1619 Quechua. gl/glg. 1914 Sindhi. 1813 Rundi. 1721 Romanian. 2119 Uruguay. vg. 0107 Argentina. ie/ile. 0818 Cyprus. ay/aym. 2408 Yiddish. 0521 Belarusian. no/nor. my/mya. sr/srp. 1605 Philippines. 1923 Swati. br. mn/mon. zh/zho. af/afr. ie. 1115 Kurdish. ca. it/ita. 0207 Canada. ml/mal. my. 1311 Malaysia. 0413 Dominican Republic. ve. dz/dzo. 0618 Georgia. 0205 Bengali. fo/fao. au. 0609 France. ha/hau. gb. 2013 Turks and Caicos Islands. 0218 Bulgaria. do. hi/hin. no. 0201 Basque. st/sot. 0126 Bashkir. aa/aar. iw/heb. rn/run. 0202 Belarus. li. az. uk/ukr. mt/mlt. 0118 Armenia. sg. 0102 Afar. th. te/tel. 0207 Burmese. hr/hrv. ba/bak. 1314 Moldavian. 2001 Tatar. bz. 0519 Suriname. ar/ara. 0215 Tigrinya. ph. 0818 Czech. 0821 Iceland. mg/mlg. 1312 Maltese. 1814 Russian. ks/kas. 1918 Serbo-Croatian. es/spa. 2023 Ukrainian. 1905 Switzerland. 2018 Turkmenistan. British. 0920 Japanese. 0904 Ireland. 2009 Tonga (Tonga Islands). 0905 Inupiaq. in. tr. 1023 Kalaallisut. sq/sqi. 1114 Kashmiri. mr/mar. mt. 0119 Aymara. 1815 Romansch. 0125 Azerbaijani. mc. xh/xho. 1912 Somali. lt/lit. 0811 Hungary. Country/Area code. 2010 Thailand. 2205 Virgin Islands. 1315 Nauru. 1913 Singapore. 1911 Slovenian. 2014 Turkmen. nl/nld. jw/jav. km/khm. sr. ga/gle. om/orm. 0326 Denmark. de/deu. 0721 Hausa. Province of China. oc/oci. 0426 English. 1121 Lao. Southern. 0825 Assamese. ar. nl. it. lt. ln/lin. ko/kor. 1220 Luxembourg. 0515 Estonian. bs. 0120 Azerbaijan. 2515 Zulu. 0911 Irish. 2125 Uzbekistan. 0325 Western Frisian. ur/urd. sk. 0118 Armenian. gd. ag. et/est. 1325 Malta. 1921 Swahili. gy. Republic of. 0714 Gujarati. 1907 Slovakia. ik/ipk. pt. 1112 Kannada. ne/nep. 0919 Indonesian. Republic of. 2011 Turkish. 0308 Taiwan. ti/tir. gr. mi/mri. mx. 1920 Spanish. ja/jpn. 2215 Welsh. sd/snd. 2207 47 En . de. 1320 Mexico. vc. 0405 Greek. 2621 06  Country/Area Code Table Country/Area name. pr. 0315 Croatia. is/isl. 0325 Czech Republic. jp. fy/fry. kr. 1101 German. mo/mol. 0101 Afrikaans. 0301 Central Khmer. 0801 Hebrew. mk. 0519 Sundanese. 0225 Belgium. 0820 Hong Kong. 0213 Brazil. ji/yid. 1013 Japan. bi/bis. 1325 Catalan. la/lat. cz. na/nau. ru. 0919 India. th/tha. 1913 Sango. 2101 United Kingdom. kk/kaz. 0226 Bermuda. 1114 Saint Lucia. as/asm. ts/tso. 1001 Javanese. 2118 Uzbek. 1911 Slovenia. be/bel. 2003 Ukraine. fj/fij. ia/ina. wo/wol. 0411 Dominica. 0109 Antigua and Barbuda. 1901 Scottish Gaelic. ru/rus. ms/msa. id. pk. 0901 Interlingue. il. 0912 Italy. 2203 San Marino. 1401 Nepali. 1909 Slovak. sa/san. tj. sh/---. 0514 Esperanto. 1918 Sweden. fi/fin. sn/sna. am. 1412 New Zealand. ht. 0821 Icelandic. 2020 Tunisia. 2608 Corsican. cs/ces. 1821 Saint Kitts and Nevis. 0301 Cayman Islands. ai. tw. ge. el/ell. bb. sl/slv. sv/swe. 1601 Persian. kn. pa/pan. 1119 Kazakh. es. 0113 Arabic. 1917 Amharic. at. 0712 Grenada. 1113 Chinese. input code Abkhazian. 0312 China. is. 0106 Albanian. tk/tuk. si. 2111 Urdu. fr. 0923 Hindi. 0718 Greenland. vi/vie. 1311 Malagasy. 0415 Estonia. 1125 Korean. ku/kur. fi. 1823 Kirghiz. 1309 Marathi. cy/cym. 0609 Fijian. or/ori. 1915 Sotho. 0319 Danish. lc. 1220 Macedonian. 1907 Sanskrit. hu/hun. 0704 Serbian. gd/gla. 1215 Latin. 1319 Malayalam. 1821 Samoan. 0314 Colombia. gu/guj. kg. 0705 Germany. uz/uzb. su/sun. 1426 Norway. 1620 Puerto Rico. uz. cy. yo/yor. sm/smo. 1919 Swedish. tn. gn/grn. 0219 Barbados. da/dan. lv. 1107 Latvia. vo/vol. 0121 Austria. pl. dk. 1214 Lithuanian. 0920 Jamaica. language code. 1611 Peru. 0914 Indonesia. the Former Yugoslav Republic of. 0725 Haiti. 2008 Tibetan. 1415 Occitan. 1307 Malay. lo/lao. kn/kan. fr/fra. input code Anguilla. hu. 0218 Bulgarian. 2126 Vietnamese. 1320 Maori. 2315 Xhosa. zu/zul. ro/ron. be. 1221 Macedonia. ro. jm. ps/pus. 0905 Israel. ky. 1904 Sinhalese. 0704 Guyana. 1405 Norwegian. pe. 1412 Dzongkha. tt. 1922 Tagalog. 0702 United States. 2014 Turkey. 0505 Finland. am/amh. 1209 Lithuania.

openssl. no fee need be paid to us. If you use it.com). These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project. STRICT LIABILITY. royalty-free. and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein.com). LOSS OF USE. WHETHER IN CONTRACT. display. as the FreeType Project is OpenSSL The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license. 5.net for information. you are not required to accept it. Definitions Throughout this license. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. the test programs. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. documentation and makefiles. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). INCLUDING. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. INCLUDING. libxml2 The MIT License Copyright © <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted. or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. create derivative works of. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. subject to the following conditions: • Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (‘FTL.com). 4. various tools and contributions which rely on. INDIRECT. not just the SSL code. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license.(‘royalty-free’ usage) • You may not pretend that you wrote this software. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. in addition to the FreeType font engine. in parts or full form. All rights reserved except as specified below. many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. in the distribution documentation. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. some of them may contain. be they named as alpha. SPECIAL. 2006 by David Turner.org. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. This license was inspired by the BSD. the FreeType Project. copy. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. INCIDENTAL. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.07 Chapter 7 Additional information Licenses The licenses for the software used on this player are shown below. However. STRICT LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. 3. INDIRECT. 3. ‘FreeType library’. where ‘using’ is a generic term including compiling the project’s source code as well as linking it to form a ‘program’ or ‘executable’. or only parts of it. you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. However. unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. OR PROFITS. though this isn’t mandatory. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.freetype. original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. DES. EXEMPLARY. We thus encourage you to use the following text: Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType Project (www. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.] • We don’t promise that this software works. INCLUDING. or relate to. ‘You’ refers to the licensee. No Warranty THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE. DATA. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES. lhash. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. Robert Wilhelm. If this package is used in a product. with or without modification. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. EXEMPLARY. or ‘FreeType Distribution’. unless otherwise stated in the file in its original. without having to pay us. ARISING FROM. including all source code. perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use. we will be interested in any kind of bug reports. the terms ‘package’. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY. 3. Artistic. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. 2. copy. TORT OR OTHERWISE. This license applies to all files found in such packages.(‘as is’ distribution) • You can use this software for whatever you want. The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. be it the RC4. advertising. Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use. OR PROFITS. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact opensslcore@openssl. All rights reserved. Robert Wilhelm. This program is referred to as ‘a program using the FreeType engine’. etc. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. and ‘FreeType archive’ refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner. However. The copyright notices of the unaltered. you must contact us to verify this. OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. For written permission.org). DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY. FreeType2 The FreeType Project LICENSE 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002. and Werner Lemberg. to deal in the Software without restriction. with or without modifications. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www. All rights reserved. zlib This software is based in part on zlib see http://www. distribute. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. code. and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. compile. 6. please contact openssl-core@openssl.e. and/or sell copies of the Software. DATA. modify. distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose. Copyright remains Eric Young’s. As you have not signed this license. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. perform. Advertising Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial. Robert Wilhelm. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. RSA. its main points are that: 48 En . LOSS OF USE. EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. including without limitation the rights to use. to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”). WHETHER IN CONTRACT.org. Finally. • Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING..(‘credits’) We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: ‘FreeType Project’.openssl. If you use our work. and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft. with or without modification. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice. or person using the project. ‘FreeType Engine’. free of charge. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. INCIDENTAL. i. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES. any additions. See below for the actual license texts. you must acknowledge us.org/)” 4. subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Redistribution This license grants a worldwide. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project. merge. publish. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. at the very least. sublicense. 2. Legal Terms 0. beta or final release. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. in commercial products. not just the unmodified files. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. (http://www.com) All rights reserved. SPECIAL. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. i. 1. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine. ‘FreeType Project’. 2. OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. but do not require. in a program. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT.com). We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM. execute. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution. and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses.This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.TXT’) unaltered. binaries and documentation. deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. As a consequence. Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.zlib. We suggest. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.e. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. and which do not fall under their own explicit license. and Werner Lemberg) as the ‘FreeType Project’. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.

3. The library is intended to be reused in other applications. filelist.png” (98x31). and you. Luis Ortiz. This software may be referred to only as “the Independent JPEG Group’s software”. Jim Boucher. not just to the unmodified library. or fitness for a particular purpose. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg. line drawings. CA. you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.doc coderules.png_get_copyright(NULL)). We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software. JPEG (pronounced “jay-peg”) is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images. industrial-strength code. The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and flexibility. then the accompanying documentation must state that “this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group”. config. through 0. If you use our work. specific licenses. for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like: printf(“%s”. through 1. Permission is hereby granted to use. and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1. etc. and wrjpgcom. either express or implied. portable. This software is copyright © 1991-1998.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S.7. its quality. jpegtran.T. (2)If only executable code is distributed. July 1. or another one contracted with the authors. 2000. • freetype-devel@nongnu. lack of warranty. then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed) before diving into the code.c for full details. start in this list if you haven’t found anything to help you in the documentation. ltmain.jpg (88x31) and “pngnow. copy. *.I. cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. 2004. two simple applications for inserting and extracting textual comments in JFIF files. and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose. specifically permit.0. special. Inc.freetype. “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. are Copyright © 1998.6. subject to the following restrictions: 1. (But if you find any bugs. distribute.26. are Copyright © 2004. or consequential damages.log Version-to-version change highlights.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. see the references. but they are essential for output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays.0. (See the REFERENCES section for introductory material.2. wizard. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. For the purposes of this copyright and license. (3)Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences. These extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. the software is not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes. Davide Rossi. Peter Deutsch. or modifying the FreeType Project. Group 42. January 1996. May 1995.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library. without fee. very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible change. rdjpgcom. with respect to this software. FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.org Discusses bugs. 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng0. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code.doc Coding style rules --. porting. without limitation. and the entire risk of satisfactory quality. Lee Crocker. we suggest reading one or more of the REFERENCES. The same holds for its supporting scripts (config. extendedsequential. please let us know!) 2.please read if you contribute code. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the following sections: OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and the IJG software. The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced with GNU Autoconf. Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park.Also. or portions hereof. are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn RandersPehrson.doc and usage. 07 49 En . This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution. June 1996. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. etc. and distribute this source code. Permission is hereby granted to use. disclaim all warranties.sourceforge. 2006-2008 Glenn RandersPehrson. Julian Minguillon. This software is the work of Tom Lane. its user. of course) is supplied in the files “pngbar. although some uncommon parameter settings libpng COPYRIGHT NOTICE. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. but we strive for it. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any purpose. and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.) However. 2002. with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: • freetype@nongnu. the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding. acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated. 3. ltconfig. only this license. sole proprietor of its copyright holder. without fee. then this README file must be included. through 1. provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. incidental. JPEG is lossy. as well as engine internals. this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do. See ARCHIVE LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article. Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. but is also freely distributable. expressed or implied. Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions. Inc. merchantability. Therefore. Lane. are Copyright © 1995. grants you the right to use. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. djpeg.guess. Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users.) Rather. Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. on typical photographic images. through 1. performance. which use the library to perform conversion between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. Thomas G.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code. accuracy. or just experiment with various compression settings. ansi2knr. We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products. You don’t have to pay us. libpng versions 0. We have also included jpegtran. Our home page can be found at http://www. usage. JPEG is intended for compressing real-world scenes. In legalese: The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation. Philip Gladstone.net 2-Apr-08 libjpg The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998 This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group’s free JPEG software. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. modify. If you use this source code in a aren’t implemented yet. example. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined in the standard. it is intended to be reliable. terms of distribution. with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0. and LICENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. including.sub. and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. design issues. the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. distributing. Please read at least the files install.0. assume no liability for direct. deletions. and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0. LEGAL ISSUES In plain English: 1.doc Overview of the JPEG library’s internal structure.96.2.2. The Contributing Authors and Group 42. The Contributing Authors and Group 42. install-sh. We don’t promise that this software works. LEGAL ISSUES Copyright. assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. is copyright by M. Another support script. A “png_get_copyright” function is available.96. In order to support file conversion and viewing software. (See the file ansi2knr.97.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions. for example. change. ansi2knr. 2008. 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat. RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get. see LEGAL ISSUES. Inc. August 15.2. However. The Contributing Authors and Group 42. a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes. TO DO Plans for future IJG releases. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a low-quality image.doc). principally. If you use it in a program. May 1997. modify.png” and “pngbar. and other members of the Independent JPEG Group.net to be added to our electronic mailing list.uu. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. below. Guido Vollbeding.88. You can use this software for whatever you want. but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation. through 0. Programmer and internal documentation: libjpeg.copyrighted material. January 1998. This software is provided “AS IS”. March 20. and modify it. Ge’ Weijers. 2000. If you are looking for support. subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES. and effort is with the user. we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG.89.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType. exemplary. DISCLAIMER. the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. and progressive compression processes. the PNG logo (in PNG format. you ought to acknowledge us. Inc. For legal reasons. by using. April 2. copy. accuracy. since ansi2knr.5. This library is provided with all faults. which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library. you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you’ve used the IJG code. we have included considerable functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability. but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.5 . This software implements JPEG baseline. without fee. are Copyright © 1996. as described under LEGAL ISSUES.doc Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.6.October 3. George Phillips.org product. while also making it fast enough to be useful. subject to these conditions: (1)If any part of the source code for this software is distributed. All Rights Reserved except as specified below.sh). IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.doc. For more details. OVERVIEW This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and decompression. even if advised of the possibility of such damage. 2. 4. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. In particular. We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files. No royalty is required.88. that you must include source code if you redistribute it. We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. Other documentation files in the distribution are: User documentation: install. and any additions.doc How to configure and install the IJG software. Road map of IJG files. as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. indirect. Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs) should contact IJG at jpeg-info@uunet. plus two sample applications “cjpeg” and “djpeg”. for any purpose. structure.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1. and “rdjpgcom” and “wrjpgcom”. with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0. 1999 Glenn RandersPehrson. meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. libpng versions 1. If you want to understand how the JPEG code works.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of this software.

gz. CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300.misc. In particular. Part 1 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images.gz. Some vendors “filled in the blanks” on their own. This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence.net/graphics/jpeg/.. Again. and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing compatibility. 34 no. Part 2 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images. You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible “zip” archive format from the SimTel archives (ftp:// ftp. and we highly recommend it. one of the original reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common. Part 1 being the actual specification.net. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. written by the PVRG group at Stanford. too. Also. DATA. speeding things up is of great interest. you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine. the resulting GIF files are larger than usual.) It’s not cheap: as of 1992.ps.edu with body send usenet/news. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.net is guaranteed to have the latest official version.mit. pp. or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179.com/graphics/tiff/TIFF6. JFIF is a minimal or “low end” representation. 4).ps. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.edu/pub/usenet/news.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif. a PostScript file containing a revised version of Wallace’s article is available at ftp://ftp.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (”AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. library 12 JPEG Tools.) The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). and other groups. news. fax (408) 944-6314 A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp://ftp.net release. INCLUDING. For the omitted details we follow the “JFIF” conventions. our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.uu.COM.95. creating proprietary formats that no one else could read. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format. As always. but Global does. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. Although IJG’s own code does not support TIFF/JPEG.) You can apply it to your programs. The TIFF 6. EXEMPLARY. we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3 extensions --. There is also a plain text version at ftp://ftp. IJG does not recommend use of the TIFF 6.uu. WHETHER IN CONTRACT.uu.C. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. 1993. etc.9). is available from ftp:// havefun.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). but it is easier to read and modify.com/graphics/tiff/. For this reason. It is available on the World Wide Web at http:/ /www. we recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead.gz.gz. If you don’t have Web or FTP access. 2nd ed. Part 1: Requirements and guidelines” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1.. while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods. and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce uncompressed GIFs. Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. We are required to state that “The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe Incorporated. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6. you must order a paper copy through ISO or ITU. you’ve got one here. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups comp. In future versions. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES.edu/graphics/graphics/packages/ NetPBM/.) If you don’t have the CACM issue handy. it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats. and it has become the de facto standard..84. If you don’t have direct Internet access.sgi.answers.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news. (Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression. (On the other hand. only ftp. including the official news.stanford.to make sure the software is free for all its users. The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF.uu. and it may not be used for commercial purposes.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for “high end” applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. Pennebaker and Joan L. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Inc. The book’s JPEG sample code is far from industrial-strength. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6. but are readable by all standard GIF decoders. Communications of the ACM. notably ftp:// wuarchive.com or from ftp:// ftp. The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 109182).answers/jpeg-faq/part2 RELATED SOFTWARE Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. A copy of the JFIF spec is available from: Literature Department C-Cube Microsystems. none of the early commercial JPEG implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files. When we speak of free software.gz. The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is Wallace.07 50 En It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. ISBN 0-442-01272-1. AT&T. Our General Public Licenses are . The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files.simtel.48.faqs.96. We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing. support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don’t know much about data compression in general. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. This particular version will be archived as ftp:// ftp. to jpeginfo@uunet. or on CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP). The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group. but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. The current method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values. The best full description of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still Image Data Compression Standard” by William B.L. which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF.uu. thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. ISBN 1-55851-434-1. Please send bug reports. April 1991 (vol. a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T. but when you are ready to look at a full implementation.answers/jpeg-faq/part1 send usenet/news. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. Part 2: Compliance testing” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA. the free libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. However.answers archive at rtfm. not price. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS The “official” archive site for this software is ftp. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated.answers archive sites.wustl. * Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This program is designed for research and experimentation rather than production use. MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document. published by M&T Books (New York). (For example. (ANSI doesn’t take credit card orders. offers of help.0 spec of 3-June92 has a number of serious problems.uu. it doesn’t do progressive JPEG.uu. Mitchell. we recommend the JPEG design proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy. variable quantization and the SPIFF file format. Boston. Copies of this Note can be obtained from ftp. Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is.) Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. “poor man’s variable quantization”. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE Trans. Note: the Wallace article is copyright ACM and IEEE. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen.net (Internet address 192. open format standards for JPEG files. We have little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. 1996. contact help@uunet. L. revision 1. we are referring to freedom. the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software . these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp. At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will remain the de-facto standard. SPIFF is interoperable with JFIF. 1991 Free Software Foundation. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. Instead. OR PROFITS. with or without modification.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more popular free and shareware viewers. and related topics. unfortunately. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. SPECIAL. in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most common variant of SPIFF. INCIDENTAL. A somewhat less technical. applications of JPEG.principally. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it. it’s much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful explanatory material. 51 Franklin Street.mit. No LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.edu: ftp://rtfm. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. Don’t use a proprietary file format! TO DO The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality.uu.sgi. and tells where to obtain them on Internet. The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically. but changing it is not allowed.net for information on retrieving files that way. This book provides good explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including JPEG.net/graphics/jpeg/ wallace.02. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode. The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general information about JPEG. UUNET’s archives are also available via UUCP.mit.answers/ jpeg-faq/. This format has been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not yet widely supported.) In the USA. and less portable than the IJG code. 30-44. send e-mail to mail-server@rtfm.0 JPEG design with the Note’s design.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp. This technique does not use the LZW algorithm. published by Van Nostrand Reinhold. the PVRG code supports lossless JPEG.graphics. but it is missing the figures. copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900. plus 7% shipping/handling. ANSI was charging $95 for Part 1 and $47 for Part 2.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. LOSS OF USE. INDIRECT.” REFERENCES We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to understand the innards of the JPEG software. If you are on a Unix machine. Milpitas.edu/pub/jpeg/. Indeed. we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer’s free PBMPLUS software. it is slower. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. June 1991 Copyright © 1989. The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format.v6b.81. ITU-T T. Inc.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/). and is available from numerous sites.) So far as we are aware. The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/ jpeg. GIF reading support has been removed altogether. 638 pp. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6. Fifth Floor. more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Compression Book by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly. harder to use. The standard is divided into two parts. Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3. AVC/H.) FILE FORMAT WARS Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. but it includes corrections and some added material. By contrast. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this distribution. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so. 1778 McCarthy Blvd. (In any case. but its major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one.ps. ITU-T T. and Mitsubishi. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. A different free JPEG implementation. which we do not.txt.uu. libupnp Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved. STRICT LIABILITY. IJG currently does not support any Part 3 extensions.sgi.83. Gregory K. there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code. Price US$59. “The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard”. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.tar.uu.

You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it. we sometimes make exceptions for this. valid for at least three years. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance. you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER. the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy. you must cause it. you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system. parties who have received copies. REPAIR OR CORRECTION. You must make sure that they. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different. For example. or rights. when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program). To prevent this. so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues). 2. b) Accompany it with a written offer. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/ OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. Finally. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/ or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE. distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces. a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code. you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above. since you have not signed it. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You may not copy. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it. sublicense or distribute the Program is void. rather. The “Program”. INCLUDING ANY GENERAL. You are not required to accept this License. 8. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. However. and all its terms and conditions for copying. keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty. sublicense. in any medium. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING. and each file 07 51 En . (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement. distribute and/or modify the software. agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. The precise terms and conditions for copying. your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement. BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES. distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. to give any third party. DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. kernel. YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING. you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run. distribution and modification follow. this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. unless that component itself accompanies the executable. and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves. The act of running the Program is not restricted. in effect making the program proprietary. Any attempt otherwise to copy. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof. NO WARRANTY 11. either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else. we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original. as a special exception. 3. which is implemented by public license practices. for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution. EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS). and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. too. distribution and modification are not covered by this License. thus forming a work based on the Program. the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you. and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). or. it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. write to the Free Software Foundation. the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler. To protect your rights. 10. 1. then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. 5. do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. and its terms. or. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations. by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program). and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy. for each author’s protection and ours. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system. OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE. modify. For an executable work. conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order. refers to any such program or work. modify. and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. below. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation. plus any associated interface definition files. provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. they are outside its scope. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program. 9. the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License. to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code.designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. To do so. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software. and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries. In such case.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on. if you distribute copies of such a program. nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM. if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place. any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. or if you modify it. that you receive source code or can get it if you want it. For example. then this License. 7. and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs. If. that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs. a work containing the Program or a portion of it. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty. whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole. 4. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses. translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”. SPECIAL. INCLUDING. attach the following notices to the program. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program. which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. Therefore. so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software. whether gratis or for a fee. receive or can get the source code. However. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License. to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. 12. complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains. and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public. the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. (Hereinafter. 6. in accord with Subsection b above. and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. However. plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions. and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer. then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. Thus. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”. and that you know you can do these things. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. write to the author to ask for permission. In addition. Also. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty. Activities other than copying.

Each licensee is addressed as “you”. and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions. (Hereinafter. too. in the event an application does not supply such function or table. applies to some specially designated software packages . permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system. it is irreversible for that copy. and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. To do this. it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library. If your program is a subroutine library. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared. software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. When we speak of free software. For example. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. If this is what you want to do. a derivative of the original library. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does. This license. receive or can get the source code. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. The precise terms and conditions for copying. In other cases. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it. they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items . Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. In this case. distribution and modification are not covered by this License. rather.1.typically libraries . version 2. either version 2 of the License. we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. Finally. if necessary. keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty. so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves. See the GNU General Public License for more details. The former contains code derived from the library. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful. and its terms. there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library. do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. if any.of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. so that it becomes a de-facto standard. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2. Inc. which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy. not price. translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”. distribute and/or modify the library. To protect your rights. Here is a sample. it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you. 52 En We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library. a work containing the Library or a portion of it. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library. version 2. 3. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. Therefore. 51 Franklin Street. make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69. we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library.. the GNU Linux operating system. By contrast. the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. To protect each distributor. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it. hence the version number 2. you must alter all the notices that refer to this License. For example. To achieve this. If you link other code with the library. For a library. This license. Of course. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish). and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above. even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. the square root function must still compute square roots. the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version. Thus. the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License. You can use it too. if the library is modified by someone else and passed on. we are referring to freedom of use.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. the GNU Lesser General Public License. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that. for details type ‘show w’.whatever suits your program. However. DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. instead of to this License. type ‘show c’ for details. . complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. but changing it is not allowed. either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.. as well as its variant. the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. below. whether gratis or for a fee. Therefore. provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty. on rare occasions. and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. in any medium. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school. alter the names: Yoyodyne.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. This is free software.07 should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place. If the program is interactive. MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. Copyright © year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). 1999 Free Software Foundation. and (2) we offer you this license. 1 April 1989 Ty Coon. The “Library”. so we use the Lesser General Public License. and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility. whether statically or using a shared library. to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program. the Lesser General Public License. then you can specify that version instead if you wish. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted. based on the explanations below. then this License. MA 02110-1301 USA. applies to certain designated libraries. and that you are informed that you can do these things. that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs. Boston. other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked. Inc. which gives you legal permission to copy. they are outside its scope. if you distribute copies of the library. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. or (at your option) any later version. the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software . there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only.> Copyright © <year> <name of author> This program is free software. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.to make sure the software is free for all its users. provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. you must provide complete object files to the recipients. plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. Fifth Floor. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom. plus any associated interface definition files. without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. 2. Once this change is made in a given copy. Also. You must make sure that they. under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code. Most GNU software.1. and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License. you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. 1. Fifth Floor. For example. Boston. Inc. the facility still operates. Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it. the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work. is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole. The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/ or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. you can redistribute it and/ or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. including some libraries. 51 Franklin Street. In addition. then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code.) Do not make any other change in these notices. 4. so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License. <signature of Ty Coon>. if not. permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. write to the Free Software Foundation. the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’. that you receive source code or can get it if you want it. February 1999 Copyright © 1991. whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. (For example. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs. a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. When a program is linked with a library. and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. Activities other than copying. distribution and modification follow. but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case. thus forming a work based on the Library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom.

you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. if the user installs one. sublicense.If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces. from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. write to the Free Software Foundation. hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above). REPAIR OR CORRECTION. above. to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library. You are not required to accept this License. you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING. Boston. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY. and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. If the Library does not specify a license version number. However. rather than copying library functions into the executable. However. 12. the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Such a work. you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. or distribute the Library is void. the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy. 51 Franklin Street. you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation. write to the author to ask for permission. provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted. attach the following notices to the library. INCLUDING ANY GENERAL. is called a “work that uses the Library”. and distribute that work under terms of your choice. 9. they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version. this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. unless that component itself accompanies the executable. but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6. then the use of the object file is unrestricted. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. 7. agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License. 8. Here is a sample. the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. 53 En . <signature of Ty Coon>. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system. this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length). is not a derivative work of the Library. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”. NO WARRANTY 15. 11. the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions. or if the work is itself a library. in isolation. EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.> Copyright © <year> <name of author> This library is free software. nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. alter the names: Yoyodyne.If. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library. if the work is an executable linked with the Library. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. Inc. uncombined with any other library facilities. Inc. INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE). or rights. as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. President of Vice That’s all there is to it! 07 [Notice on GNU General Public License] This product include the software licensed for use under the terms of a GNU General Public License. or (at your option) any later version. alternatively. as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues). as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. INCLUDING. we sometimes make exceptions for this. You must supply a copy of this License. kernel. with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”. 6. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations. and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. As an exception to the Sections above. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place. for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.5. since you have not signed it. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs. However. if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library. Any attempt otherwise to copy. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.) Otherwise. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 16. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library. OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE. and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance. See the GNU website (http://www.Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library). under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library. and.. contact your local Pioneer Customer Support Center. if not. and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library. c) Accompany the work with a written offer. so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. If the work during execution displays copyright notices.. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. as a special exception. 10.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. Therefore. provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. as object code and/or source code. and all its terms and conditions for copying. modify. To apply these terms. if any. you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them. The executable is therefore covered by this License. link with. MA 02110-1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.org) for details of the GNU General Public License. sublicense. However. 14. and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER. modify. Fifth Floor. BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES. and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters. the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler. and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or. SPECIAL. valid for at least three years. In such case. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system. parties who have received copies. but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a. link with.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE. so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. data structure layouts and accessors. regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. 1 April 1990 Ty Coon. and distribute such a combined library.The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/ or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library). You may not copy.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these. if the work is a derivative of the Library. distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License. you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library. it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library. distribute. link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. if necessary. by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library). To obtain a copy. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. rather than a “work that uses the library”. or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. 13. the balance of the section is intended to apply. For example. <one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does. Also. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty. write to the Free Software Foundation. A copy of the corresponding source code can be obtained by being charged the fee for distribution.gnu. either version 2. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library.1 of the License. For an executable.

etc. Avoid the following types of places: • Places exposed to direct sunlight • Humid or poorly ventilated places • Extremely hot or cold places • Places subject to vibration • Dusty places • Places exposed to soot. Condensation If the player is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room (in winter. water droplets (condensation) may form inside (on operating parts and the lens). In the same way. This is not a malfunction with the player or TV. Lastly. Cleaning the pickup lens The player’s lens should not become dirty in normal use.  Keep away from heat Do not place the player on top of an amplifier or other device generating heat. move the player to a different place. we advise against using them since some may damage the lens.  Do not place objects on top Do not place objects on top of the player. and the unit could be damaged. The door will hamper the movement of the disc tray. Also. wipe the player with a soft cloth. and close the disc tray. 54 En . Handling discs Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs. consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center. then wipe again with a dry cloth.) Cleaning the player Normally. If this happens. for example) or if the temperature in the room in which the player is installed rises suddenly due to a heater. Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not press the  OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control to open the disc tray while the glass door is closed. and do not cover the player with a cloth. Wait at least 10 seconds.  Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the player on a shaggy rug. Let the player stand at room temperature for 1 or 2 hours with the power turned on (the time depends on the extent of condensation). or sofa. When installing in a rack.. the player will not operate properly and playback is not possible. wring out thoroughly. Never lift or move the unit during playback — discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. For tough dirt.07 Cautions on use Moving the player If you need to move this unit. Doing so will prevent heat dissipation and could lead to damage. steam or heat (in kitchens. etc. Do not place the player on top of a TV or color monitor. as this could damage the cabinet. If this happens. place it on a shelf below the amplifier whenever possible. Next. apply some neutral detergent diluted in 5 to 6 parts water to a soft cloth. thinner. Note that getting alcohol. to avoid the heat generated by the amplifier and other devices. avoid leaving rubber or vinyl products in contact with the player for long periods of time. press  STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby. Turn the power off when not using the player Depending on the conditions of the TV broadcast signals. etc. disconnect the power cord. Do not load more than one disc into the player at a time. checking that the POWER OFF indication on the front panel display goes off. The water droplets will dissipate and playback will become possible. When using chemical-impregnated wipes. Condensation can also occur in the summer if the player is exposed to the direct wind from an air-conditioner. When condensation is present. Place of installation Select a stable place near the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. benzene or insecticide on the player could cause the print and coating to peel off. first remove the disc if there’s one loaded.. turn the player’s power off. Although lens cleaners for players are commercially available. striped patterns may appear on the screen when the TV is turned on while the player’s power is turned on. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet when cleaning the player. read the wipe’s cautions carefully. Keep it away from cassette decks or other components easily affected by magnetism. bed. etc. wipe off the dirt. noise may be heard in the sound of a radio. but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt. Do not scratch the disc’s signal surface or let it get dirty.

Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. wipe off the dirt. Specially shaped discs (heart-shaped. Is the disc scratched? Is the disc dirty? Is there a piece of paper or sticker attached to the disc? It may not be possible to play scratched discs. ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. etc. using a cleaning cloth. Never use such discs. The disc may be warped and unplayable. apply some water to a soft cloth. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below. • Check whether or not the file is damaged.Do not glue paper or put stickers onto the disc. etc. avoiding places exposed to high temperature or humidity. Do not use benzene. thinner or other volatile chemicals. Do not use a dirty cleaning cloth. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble or malfunction. Carefully wipe off the water droplets from the disc surface before using the disc. to wipe the disc gently from the center toward the outer edge. Check Is the disc one that is playable on this player? Remedy Check whether the disc is one that can be played on this player (page 7). In this case. check the points below. Is the region number correct? See About region numbers on page 9 for the region numbers of discs that can be played on this player. Clean the disc (above). Discs will not play properly if there is condensation on them. For tough dirt. Is the disc properly set in the • Set the disc with the printed side facing up. then wipe off the moisture with a dry cloth. Is the file one that is playable • Check whether the file is one that can be played on this player on this player? (page 9). for example).. direct sunlight or extremely low temperatures. or use a pencil. water droplets (condensation) may form on the disc surface. 55 En .  Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room (in winter.  Cleaning discs It may not be possible to play the disc if there are fingerprints or dust on it. disc tray? • Set the disc properly in the depression in the disc tray. 07  Specially shaped discs  Storing discs Always store discs in their cases. These could all damage the disc. as they will damage the player. Also do not use record spray or antistatic agents. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. and place the cases vertically. • Disc tray opens automatically. wring out thoroughly.) cannot be used on this player. If you think that there is something wrong with this component. Playback Problem • Disc does not play. Be sure to read the cautions included with the disc. hexagonal.

the picture will not be displayed properly when the copy protected DVD title is played. Motion is unnatural or picture is not clear. then turn the power back on. In this case. Press  while pressing  on the player’s front panel to restore the video outputs to the factory default settings. Connect the player and TV directly. • If the power cannot be turned off. Is NTSC on PAL TV properly When viewing the video signals output from the player’s S-Video or set? Video terminal. press  STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel to turn off the power. • Is the player connected with an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI™ cable (with a Standard HDMI™ cable)? • Are you using an HDMI cable with built-in equalizer? Does the connected TV support the frame rate of the video signal being output by the player? 1080p or Deep Color video signals may not be output properly. the picture will not be displayed properly due to analog copy protection. replace it with a new one. connect using an HDMI cable (page 13). • Insert the cable firmly and all the way in. the picture will not be displayed even when playback is stopped. terminal selected with VIDEO SELECT? Is the output video resolution Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch to a resolution at which the video properly set? and audio signals are output (page 21). • Press  STOP to stop playback. Is the input setting on the connected TV or AV receiver or amplifier right? Read the operating instructions of the connected components and switch to the proper input. Change the Pure Cinema setting (page 34). • If the player and TV are connected via a DVD recorder/video deck. it may not be possible to output the video signals from the VIDEO output terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. • If the playback cannot be stopped. In this case. With some discs. Then. Eject the disc and close the disc tray. Is the video cable damaged? If the cable is damaged. connect the TV using a High Speed HDMI™ cable without built-in equalizer. • Picture is disturbed during playback. • This player supports Macrovision analog copy protection technology. After this. etc. The picture may not be displayed properly if a DVI device is connected. No picture is displayed or the Is the video cable properly picture is not displayed connected? properly. If the picture is not displayed when playing a disc with a frame rate that is not supported. then restart playback. use the procedure below to switch the frame rate of the video signals output from the player. press  OPEN/CLOSE while pressing  on the player’s front panel to switch to a frame rate supported by the connected TV. then reset the player using the Setup Navigator (page 18). Are you viewing the picture Press VIDEO SELECT to switch the video output terminal to be viewed from the video output (page 21). set NTSC on PAL TV properly (page 37). The power will turn off. 56 En . Is a DVI device connected? Is HDMI Color Space properly set? Picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working. No picture is displayed or picture is not output in high definition when playing BDs. press and hold  STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel for over 5 seconds. With some TVs (such as with built-in video deck).. Change the HDMI Color Space setting (page 38).07 Problem Check Remedy • Connect the cable properly according to the connected devices (page 13). depending on the HDMI cable being used or the player’s settings. This is not a malfunction. if you wish to output the video signals with 1080p or Deep Color. • Picture is dark.

For some BDs. Is Output Terminal properly Set Output Terminal properly (pages 18 and 43). 07 Picture is interrupted. 1080/60i. Once connections are completed. Sound and picture are not synchronized. speaker settings. • Aspect ratio cannot be switched. (page 38). Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT terminal or the AUDIO OUT terminals (page 16). properly set? Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be output from the HDMI OUT terminal if a DVI device is connected. no audio signals are output from the HDMI OUT or DIGITAL OUT terminal set? (page 43). Is the audio cable damaged? If the cable is damaged. they may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) (page 37). set? Is Output Terminal properly When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal. use Setup Navigator to make the player’s settings (page 18). 57 En . 720/50p.Problem • Picture is stretched. replace it with a new one. input.) properly set? Are you trying to listen to the sound of the HDMI OUT terminal while watching the picture from the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals? Read the operating instructions of the connected components and check the volume. The subtitles cannot be switched for discs recorded on a DVD or BD recorder. Set 4:3 Video Out properly (page 37). • No sound is output. • Sound is not output properly. slow motion? Is the disc played back in fast forward or fast reverse? Are the audio cables properly • Connect the cable properly according to the connected devices (page 13). set? Is Lip Sync properly set? Adjust the amount of audio delay with the Lip Sync setting (page 35). The picture may be interrupted when the resolution of the recorded video signal switches. 1080/24p. Is the disc played back in No sound is output during slow motion play and forward and reverse scanning. audio signals are only output from DIGITAL OUT terminal or the HDMI OUT terminal. Set TV Aspect Ratio properly (page 37). • Picture is cropped. Are the connected components (AV receiver or amplifier. Audio signals are not output from the HDMI OUT terminal when video signals are being output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals. etc. 1080/60p or 720/60p are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION to select a setting other than Auto or Source Direct (page 21). 1080/50p. When watching the picture of the COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals. connect an optical digital audio cable or regular audio cables to listen to the sound (page 16). connected? • Insert the cable firmly and all the way in. When video signals with a resolution of 1080/50i. Check Is the TV’s aspect ratio properly set? Is TV Aspect Ratio properly set? Is 4:3 Video Out properly set? Is DVD 16:9 Video Out properly set? Remedy Read the TV’s operating instructions and set the TV’s aspect ratio properly. The subtitles cannot be switched. Is HDMI Audio Out properly Set HDMI Audio Out to Auto or PCM. Set DVD 16:9 Video Out properly (page 37). etc. Is the output video resolution Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to switch to the resolution at which the video and audio signals are output (page 21).

set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1. If this happens. set BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority to BDMV (page 39). loading may take several dozen minutes.. Are there too many files Loading stays displayed and recorded on the disc? playback does not start. Use the menu screen or AUDIO to switch the disc’s sound to multichannel. Is HDMI Audio Out properly When listening to the sound from an HDMI OUT terminal. Noise can be heard when outputting DTS Digital Surround signals from the DIGITAL OUT terminal. DTS Out to DTS 1 (page 37). are audio signals being output from devices connected with cables other than HDMI cables? When listening to the sound from an DIGITAL OUT terminal. Sound is fast or slow. properly set? Is multi-channel sound selected? Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or amplifier and check the audio output settings of AV receiver or amplifier. • Perform Application Data Erase (page 42). Set set? Output Terminal properly (page 43). Is Hybrid Disc Playback properly set? Set Hybrid Disc Playback to CD (page 39). set DTS Out to DTS Digital Surround? DTS  PCM (page 37). • Perform Individual/Shared Data Erase or Storage Format (page 42). set HDMI set? Audio Out to PCM (page 38). A message indicating low memory appears while playing a BD-ROM disc. set PQLS to Off (page 38). Secondary audio or interactive audio is not output. When a disc on which files are recorded is inserted. Because of this. The signals are automatically converted to 48 kHz or less for output. etc. the PQLS function is activated when playing discs. 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals cannot be output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal. When a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function is connected directly to the player’s HDMI OUT terminal using an HDMI cable. Are Dolby Digital Out and DTS Out properly set? When an HDMI cable is connected. Is the connected AV receiver If an AV receiver or amplifier that is not compatible with DTS Digital or amplifier compatible with Surround is connected to the DIGITAL OUT terminal.07 Problem Multi-channel sound is not output. etc. Check Remedy Is Output Terminal properly Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from output terminals other than the one set at Output Terminal under Audio Out. It is not possible to output 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals from this player’s DIGITAL OUT terminal. To play the BDMV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV formats. depending on the number of files recorded on the disc. the sound output from components other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast or slow. The characters that cannot be displayed on this player are displayed in . Is the audio output of the connected AV receiver or amplifier.  is displayed in file names. Set Hybrid Disc Playback to DVD (page 39). After a disc is inserted. The DVD layer of BD and DVD Is Hybrid Disc Playback hybrid discs cannot be properly set? played. The CD layer of BD and CD hybrid discs cannot be played. 58 En . The BDMV format on BD-R/ -RE discs cannot be played.

The KURO LINK function may not work properly if HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI™ cable is used. even when connected using an HDMI cable. including this player. some of the functions may not work. This is displayed if the BD-ROM does not have valid BD-LIVE network access approval. etc. Check Remedy Perform Connection Test (page 42). Once connections and settings of all the devices are finished. • The KURO LINK function will not work with devices of other brands that do not support the KURO LINK function. Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected device. 59 En . and AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. • See About connections to components of other makes supporting the KURO LINK function on page 15. (Also check after changing the connected devices and connecting and/or disconnecting HDMI cables. etc. • Even when connected to a Pioneer product compatible with the KURO LINK function. If video signals are being output from a terminal other than the HDMI OUT terminal. If “Network connection test completed successfully. the KURO LINK function does not work. “OK to grant network access to BD applications?” is displayed when a BD-LIVE compatible disc is read. • The KURO LINK function will not work if devices that do not support the KURO LINK function are connected between the KURO LINKcompatible device and the player. Connect to the TV using an HDMI cable and press VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT terminal (pages 15 and 21). be sure to check that the player’s picture is output to the Flat Screen TV. Network Problem • BD-LIVE function (connection to the Internet) cannot be used. The KURO LINK function may not work if three or more players. Set KURO LINK to On on the connected device.) and HD AV Converter to the HDMI OUT terminal (page 15). are connected by HDMI cable. Also there may be a problem with the Internet connection. Contact your Internet service provider.) when playback is started on the player or the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed. the KURO LINK function may not work properly. refer to the operating instructions of the connected device. • “Connection to the software updating server failed” is displayed when you try to update the software.KURO LINK Problem KURO LINK function does not work. Set Display Power On to On (page 38). The KURO LINK function operates when KURO LINK is set to On for all devices connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. Set KURO LINK to On on the player (page 38). Check Is the HDMI cable properly connected? Is the HDMI cable you are using a High Speed HDMI™ cable? Are you connected to the TV using an HDMI cable to watch the picture? Is KURO LINK set to On on the player? Does the connected device support the KURO LINK function? Remedy To use the KURO LINK function. 07 Is KURO LINK set to On on the connected device? Are multiple players connected? Is Display Power On set to The input does not switch Off on the player? automatically on the Flat Screen TV and AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. Select No if you do not want to authorize access to the network. Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable. For details.” is displayed.) If the player’s picture is not being output to the Flat Screen TV. connect the Flat Screen TV. check the proxy server settings (page 41).

Is “LAN cable not connected” Check that this player and Ethernet hub (or router with hub displayed? functionality) are properly connected. If you do not want the inputs of the connected TV. Is an AV receiver or amplifier Operate with the remote control of the device connected to the connected to the CONTROL CONTROL IN terminal. check the setting is correct at the Display Network Configuration (page 41). please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. see the operating instructions of the Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality). • “WRT NG ****” is displayed on the front panel display during software updating. • If this player’s has been set manually. etc. A message other than “Network connection test completed successfully” is displayed when Connection Test is performed. The input of the TV.” displayed? • Is “No response from the gateway. set Display Power Off to Off (page 38). • Reboot the Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality). and AV system and HD AV Converter switches automatically. . and AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. some time may be required to update the software. The player’s power may turn on together with the power of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. Check Remedy Depending on the Internet connection and other conditions. Is KURO LINK set to On? 60 En “Processing failed. For details on the DHCP server function. etc.” • Check the operation and settings of the DHCP server function of the displayed? Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality).” is displayed.) is displayed. and AV system (AV receiver or amplifier. control from a point too far away from the player? Are the batteries dead? Replace the batteries (page 6). The player’s power may turn off together with the power of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. The message is displayed when software updating has failed. see the operating instructions of the Ethernet operating properly? hub.07 Problem Software updating is slow. the player’s power turns off automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes (page 40).” displayed? • If the IP address is obtained using the DHCP server function. Is KURO LINK set to On? Player cannot be operated with remote control. Is the Ethernet hub (or router • Check the settings and operation the Ethernet hub (or router with hub with hub functionality) functionality). • Set the IP address manually. Check again whether it can be updated properly. set KURO LINK to Off (page 38). • Is “IP address cannot be obtained. If you do not want the player’s power to turn off when the TV’s power is turned off. (**** meaning any characters) • “WRT FAILED” is displayed on the front panel display during software updating. IN terminal on the player’s rear panel? Are you operating the remote Operate from within 7 m of the remote control sensor. If you do not want the player’s power to turn on when the TV’s power is turned on.) and HD AV Converter to switch automatically. reset the IP address of this player or other components. Input of connected TV. If the message appears repeatedly.) and HD AV Converter connected to the HDMI OUT terminal may automatically switch to the player when playback starts on the player or the menu screen (Home Media Gallery. etc. see the operating instructions of the Ethernet hub (or router with hub functionality). Others Problem The player’s power turns off automatically. set KURO LINK to Off (page 38). Check Is Auto Power Off set to On? Is Display Power Off set to On? Remedy If Auto Power Off is set to On. For details. The player’s power turns on automatically. For details on the DHCP server function. Is “IP address is overlapped.

Only external storage devices with a FAT16 or FAT32 file system can be used. It is used to direct data to networks on which the destination gateway is not explicitly specified. the Audio Visual Format Specifications for HD digital broadcast recording is referred to as BDAV on this player and in this operating instructions. letting you view the same scene from different angles.  DNS (Domain Name System) This is a system for associating Internet host names with IP addresses.  Deep Color See About HDMI on page 13. the Audio Visual Format Specifications designed for pre-packaged high definition (HD) movie contents is referred to as BDMV on this player and in this operating instructions. Use a USB cable with a length of 2 meters or less. 61 En .Problem Check Remedy Always press  STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel or  STANDBY/ON on the remote control and check that POWER OFF has turned off from the player’s front panel display before disconnecting the power cord. • Turn the player’s power off. power cord while the player’s power was on? • Has there been a power failure? EXT does not light on the Is the external storage device player’s front panel display properly connected? when a USB (external storage) device is connected. then turn the power back on. Turn the player’s power off. Some external storage devices may not operate.  BD-LIVE See Playing BDs on page 8. a memory card reader or USB hub? Does the external storage device contain multiple partitions? External storage devices may not be recognized if they contain multiple partitions.  DivX See Supported video file formats on page 9.  Component video output This video output terminal provides clearer pictures when connected to a TV equipped with component inputs.  BDMV Of the BD format. then turn the power back on.1 channels with a fraction of the amount of data as compared to linear PCM audio signals.  BD-J See Playing BDs on page 8. then turn the external hard disk’s power on. Y.  DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) This protocol provides configuration parameters (IP address. EXT flashes on the player’s Is the external storage device front panel display when a write-protected? USB (external storage) device Is the external storage is connected. • Turn the player’s power off. PB and PR.  AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) See Playing DVDs on page 9. Be particularly careful when the power cord is connected to the AC outlet on another device because the player turns off in conjunction with the device. then reconnect the external storage device (page 16). Glossary  Angle (Multi angle) Up to 9 camera angles can be recorded simultaneously on BDROM or DVD-Video discs. etc. Component video signals consist of three signals. device’s file system FAT16 or FAT32? Turn the player’s power off.  Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an audio format to record the sound in up to 5.  BDAV Of the BD format.) for computers and other devices connected to the network. then disable the write-protection. They may be usable if they are formatted from the player (page 42). 07 Settings you have made have • Have you disconnected the been cleared. Turn the player’s power off.  Default Gateway A default gateway is a communication device such as a router which passes data between networks. Are you using a USB cable that is longer than 2 meters? Is the power of the external hard disk turned on? Is the external storage device External storage device may not work if connected to the USB port via connected to the USB port via a memory card reader or USB hub.  BONUSVIEW See Playing BDs on page 8.

62 En  x. or up to 6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.v. one picture is consisted of a single picture.  Subnet mask This is used to identify which part of the IP address corresponds to the subnet (a separately managed network).07  Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an audio format for high-definition media. DRM is a technology for restricting the distribution or playback of such digital data without the authorization of the copyright holder.  Port number This is a sub-address provided below the IP address for simultaneously connecting to multiple parties during Internet communications.255. With BDROMs.  HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) See About HDMI on page 13.  Parental Lock See Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs and Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs on page 43. or 5.  Interlaced scan With this method. one picture is displayed by scanning it twice.  Progressive scan With this method. etc.  Frames and fields A frame is the unit for one of the still pictures which compose motion pictures. Built on Dolby Digital.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits. or horizontal lines. The video encoding standards include MPEG-1 Video. It is represented a number in four sections. in the same location. images and audio retain the same quality even when they are copied or transferred repeatedly. Interlaced scan is indicated in this player and operating instructions by an “i” after the resolution value (for example.  Interactive audio The audio signals recorded in the titles of BD-ROMs.0”.  Linear PCM This is referred as the audio signals that are not compressed. to form a single picture (frame). With BD-ROMs. .  VC-1 A video codec developed by Microsoft and standardized by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). This player supports 100BASE-TX.  DRM A technology for protecting copyrighted digital data. the even lines are displayed in the second. The subnet mask is expressed as “255.255. On some discs this secondary audio is recorded as the audio for the secondary video. It can record 7.1 channels of digital sound can be recorded. it combines the efficiency and flexibility to provide high quality multi-channel audio. 576p). etc.  Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an audio format using lossless coding.). One frame consists of a picture of odd lines and a picture of even lines called fields in video signal with interlaced scan method (576i.  MAC (Media Access Control) address A hardware identification number assigned specifically to the network device (LAN card. 1080i. MPEG-2 Audio. MPEG-2 AAC.  MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) The name of a family of standards used to encode video and audio signals in a digital compressed format.  USB(Universal Serial Bus) USB is the industry standard for connecting peripherals to PCs.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits.  Region number See About region numbers on page 9. MPEG-2 Video. Some BDs include videos encoded in this codec. 576i). MPEG-4 Visual. With BD-ROMs. The odd lines are displayed in the first pass. etc.  IP address An address that identifies a computer or other device connected to the Internet or local area network.1 channels. etc. Digitized videos.  Secondary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio streams mixed with the main audio stream. 7. which can be superimposed on the primary video. The audio encoding standards include MPEG1 Audio.  Ethernet A standard for local area networks (LANs) used to connect multiple computers. These sub videos are called “secondary video”.1 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits.  Proxy server This is a relay server for ensuring fast access and safe communications when connecting to the Internet from an internal network. up to 7.  Secondary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos superimposed on the main videos using the Picture-in-Picture function. MPEG-4 AVC. graphics. Some BD-ROMs include secondary video.Color See About HDMI on page 13. etc.  DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an audio format using lossless coding.  DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is an audio format to record 48 kHz/24 bits audio signals in 5.  Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a function for superimposing a sub video on the main video. Progressive scan is indicated in this player and operating instructions by a “p” after the resolution value (for example. without dividing it in two pictures.).  DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audio format using lossy coding. These sub audio streams are called “secondary audio”. in particular for still pictures that contain much text. They include for example the clicking sound made when the menu screen is operated. Progressive scan provides clear pictures with no flicker. up to 8 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits.

–20 dB) 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sampling) 1 set.3 W 3. PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) 1 set.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) PB. RCA jacks 200 mVrms (1 kHz.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) 1 set.Specifications Model Type Rated voltage BDP-LX52 Blu-ray Disc PLAYER Europe. 63 En . Ethernet jack (100BASE-TX) Input 1 set. 250 mA 1 set. • This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. Minijack (3. Type A 07 Audio outputs 2-channel (left/right) Audio output level Frequency response Digital audio outputs LAN Control USB Optical Note • The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice. 19-pin: 5 V. RCA jacks: Y: 1. Optical digital jack 1 set. RCA jack: 1.5 ø) 1 set. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.6 kg 420 mm (W) x 83 mm (H) x 287 mm (D) +5 °C to +35 °C 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) 1 set. Australia and New Zealand models: AC 220 V to 240 V Others: AC 110 V to 240 V Rated frequency Power consumption Power consumption (standby) Weight External dimensions (including projecting parts) Tolerable operating temperature Tolerable operating humidity Output terminals HDMI Video outputs Video Component video 50 Hz/60 Hz 32 W 0.

Sec. Markham. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En Published by Pioneer Corporation.co.H. Australia. Malaysia (03) 2697-2920 http://www. 17/F.com. 13A Jakarta-Pusat Indonesia (21) 6331-924 http://www.com. Taiwan (886 2) 2521-3166 http://www.com. Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.sg/firmwaredownload Taiwan Pioneer High Fidelity Taiwan Co.F. Victoria 3195. B-9120 Melsele.LTD 91/1 Floor 1&7 Chaiyo Building. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA.html Australia. Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. VIC 3170. Meguro 1-Chome. 300 Allstate Parkway. 1008.pioneer.com. <VRB1514-A> Printed in . Ontario L3R 0P2.sg/firmwaredownload Thailand Pioneer Electronics (Thailand) CO. Rama 9 Road. Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250.pioneer. Adab Alam Electronic Jl.S. K. Hollybush Hill.A.05.. Hong Kong (852) 3583 3288 https://www. 21-33 Tai Lin Pai Road.com.pioneerhongkong.uk/uk/content/support/support/upgrade. 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE.O.com. New Zealand and other Oceania area Pioneer Electronics Australia Pty Ltd 2211 Princes Highway. BOX 1540. LTD.2 Taipei.sg/firmwaredownload Malaysia Pioneer Technology (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd 16th Floor.V.Customer Service Center Unit 2.K.hk Singapore Pioneer Electronics AsiaCentre Pte Ltd 253 Alexandra Road (Komoco Building)#04-01. Thailand (662) 6439-444 http://www. Menara Uni. 178-184 Boundary Road.pioneer. Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation. Asia. Lobby 2 Singapore 159936 (65) 6472-7555 http://www. Kuala Lumpur. Mexico. #04-01. All rights reserved. Stoke Poges Slough.tw Indonesia PT.pioneer-twn. INC. LTD. California 90801-1540.Please refer to our website for information regarding software updates and service to this product.A.sg/firmwaredownload PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1. Australia 1800 988 268 http://www. DE C. U. Belgium TEL: 03/570.com.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.44. Meguro-ku. No. Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901. Kwai Chung. Zainul Arifin No. Vanta Industrial Centre. Pioneer GB LTD.Lomas de Chapultepec.pioneer. 253 Alexandra Road. Long Beach. Huaykwang District Bangkok 10320. Blvd. TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S. Mulgrave. Tokyo 153-8654. Contact information: U.pioneer. Keetberglaan 1. Chung Shan North Road. Buckinghamshire SL2 4QP UNITED KINGDOM 0870 600 1539 http://www.D. Ltd 13th Floor. P.pioneer.au Hong Kong Pioneer (HK) Limited . Braeside.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful